Home | History | Annotate | Download | only in info
      1 This is ld.info, produced by makeinfo version 4.8 from ld.texinfo.
      2 
      3 INFO-DIR-SECTION Software development
      4 START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
      5 * Ld: (ld).                       The GNU linker.
      6 END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
      7 
      8    This file documents the GNU linker LD (GNU Binutils) version 2.21.90.
      9 
     10    Copyright (C) 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999,
     11 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free
     12 Software Foundation, Inc.
     13 
     14    Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
     15 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or
     16 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
     17 Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover
     18 Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU
     19 Free Documentation License".
     20 
     21 
     22 File: ld.info,  Node: Top,  Next: Overview,  Up: (dir)
     23 
     24 LD
     25 **
     26 
     27 This file documents the GNU linker ld (GNU Binutils) version 2.21.90.
     28 
     29    This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
     30 Documentation License version 1.3.  A copy of the license is included
     31 in the section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License".
     32 
     33 * Menu:
     34 
     35 * Overview::                    Overview
     36 * Invocation::                  Invocation
     37 * Scripts::                     Linker Scripts
     38 
     39 * Machine Dependent::           Machine Dependent Features
     40 
     41 * BFD::                         BFD
     42 
     43 * Reporting Bugs::              Reporting Bugs
     44 * MRI::                         MRI Compatible Script Files
     45 * GNU Free Documentation License::  GNU Free Documentation License
     46 * LD Index::                       LD Index
     47 
     48 
     49 File: ld.info,  Node: Overview,  Next: Invocation,  Prev: Top,  Up: Top
     50 
     51 1 Overview
     52 **********
     53 
     54 `ld' combines a number of object and archive files, relocates their
     55 data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in compiling
     56 a program is to run `ld'.
     57 
     58    `ld' accepts Linker Command Language files written in a superset of
     59 AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax, to provide explicit and
     60 total control over the linking process.
     61 
     62    This version of `ld' uses the general purpose BFD libraries to
     63 operate on object files. This allows `ld' to read, combine, and write
     64 object files in many different formats--for example, COFF or `a.out'.
     65 Different formats may be linked together to produce any available kind
     66 of object file.  *Note BFD::, for more information.
     67 
     68    Aside from its flexibility, the GNU linker is more helpful than other
     69 linkers in providing diagnostic information.  Many linkers abandon
     70 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
     71 `ld' continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors (or, in
     72 some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
     73 
     74 
     75 File: ld.info,  Node: Invocation,  Next: Scripts,  Prev: Overview,  Up: Top
     76 
     77 2 Invocation
     78 ************
     79 
     80 The GNU linker `ld' is meant to cover a broad range of situations, and
     81 to be as compatible as possible with other linkers.  As a result, you
     82 have many choices to control its behavior.
     83 
     84 * Menu:
     85 
     86 * Options::                     Command Line Options
     87 * Environment::                 Environment Variables
     88 
     89 
     90 File: ld.info,  Node: Options,  Next: Environment,  Up: Invocation
     91 
     92 2.1 Command Line Options
     93 ========================
     94 
     95    The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
     96 practice few of them are used in any particular context.  For instance,
     97 a frequent use of `ld' is to link standard Unix object files on a
     98 standard, supported Unix system.  On such a system, to link a file
     99 `hello.o':
    100 
    101      ld -o OUTPUT /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
    102 
    103    This tells `ld' to produce a file called OUTPUT as the result of
    104 linking the file `/lib/crt0.o' with `hello.o' and the library `libc.a',
    105 which will come from the standard search directories.  (See the
    106 discussion of the `-l' option below.)
    107 
    108    Some of the command-line options to `ld' may be specified at any
    109 point in the command line.  However, options which refer to files, such
    110 as `-l' or `-T', cause the file to be read at the point at which the
    111 option appears in the command line, relative to the object files and
    112 other file options.  Repeating non-file options with a different
    113 argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
    114 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
    115 option.  Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
    116 noted in the descriptions below.
    117 
    118    Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be
    119 linked together.  They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with
    120 command-line options, except that an object file argument may not be
    121 placed between an option and its argument.
    122 
    123    Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you
    124 can specify other forms of binary input files using `-l', `-R', and the
    125 script command language.  If _no_ binary input files at all are
    126 specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
    127 message `No input files'.
    128 
    129    If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
    130 assume that it is a linker script.  A script specified in this way
    131 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
    132 linker script or the one specified by using `-T').  This feature
    133 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
    134 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
    135 `INPUT' or `GROUP' to load other objects.  Specifying a script in this
    136 way merely augments the main linker script, with the extra commands
    137 placed after the main script; use the `-T' option to replace the
    138 default linker script entirely, but note the effect of the `INSERT'
    139 command.  *Note Scripts::.
    140 
    141    For options whose names are a single letter, option arguments must
    142 either follow the option letter without intervening whitespace, or be
    143 given as separate arguments immediately following the option that
    144 requires them.
    145 
    146    For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two
    147 can precede the option name; for example, `-trace-symbol' and
    148 `--trace-symbol' are equivalent.  Note--there is one exception to this
    149 rule.  Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
    150 only be preceded by two dashes.  This is to reduce confusion with the
    151 `-o' option.  So for example `-omagic' sets the output file name to
    152 `magic' whereas `--omagic' sets the NMAGIC flag on the output.
    153 
    154    Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from
    155 the option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
    156 immediately following the option that requires them.  For example,
    157 `--trace-symbol foo' and `--trace-symbol=foo' are equivalent.  Unique
    158 abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are accepted.
    159 
    160    Note--if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler
    161 driver (e.g. `gcc') then all the linker command line options should be
    162 prefixed by `-Wl,' (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
    163 compiler driver) like this:
    164 
    165        gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
    166 
    167    This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
    168 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link.  Confusion
    169 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
    170 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as a
    171 separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
    172 and the argument to the compiler.  In this case, it is simplest to use
    173 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
    174 
    175        gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
    176 
    177    Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the
    178 GNU linker:
    179 
    180 `@FILE'
    181      Read command-line options from FILE.  The options read are
    182      inserted in place of the original @FILE option.  If FILE does not
    183      exist, or cannot be read, then the option will be treated
    184      literally, and not removed.
    185 
    186      Options in FILE are separated by whitespace.  A whitespace
    187      character may be included in an option by surrounding the entire
    188      option in either single or double quotes.  Any character
    189      (including a backslash) may be included by prefixing the character
    190      to be included with a backslash.  The FILE may itself contain
    191      additional @FILE options; any such options will be processed
    192      recursively.
    193 
    194 `-a KEYWORD'
    195      This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility.  The KEYWORD
    196      argument must be one of the strings `archive', `shared', or
    197      `default'.  `-aarchive' is functionally equivalent to `-Bstatic',
    198      and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent to
    199      `-Bdynamic'.  This option may be used any number of times.
    200 
    201 `--audit AUDITLIB'
    202      Adds AUDITLIB to the `DT_AUDIT' entry of the dynamic section.
    203      AUDITLIB is not checked for existence, nor will it use the
    204      DT_SONAME specified in the library.  If specified multiple times
    205      `DT_AUDIT' will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces
    206      to use. If the linker finds an object with an audit entry while
    207      searching for shared libraries, it will add a corresponding
    208      `DT_DEPAUDIT' entry in the output file.  This option is only
    209      meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
    210 
    211 `-A ARCHITECTURE'
    212 `--architecture=ARCHITECTURE'
    213      In the current release of `ld', this option is useful only for the
    214      Intel 960 family of architectures.  In that `ld' configuration, the
    215      ARCHITECTURE argument identifies the particular architecture in
    216      the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
    217      archive-library search path.  *Note `ld' and the Intel 960 family:
    218      i960, for details.
    219 
    220      Future releases of `ld' may support similar functionality for
    221      other architecture families.
    222 
    223 `-b INPUT-FORMAT'
    224 `--format=INPUT-FORMAT'
    225      `ld' may be configured to support more than one kind of object
    226      file.  If your `ld' is configured this way, you can use the `-b'
    227      option to specify the binary format for input object files that
    228      follow this option on the command line.  Even when `ld' is
    229      configured to support alternative object formats, you don't
    230      usually need to specify this, as `ld' should be configured to
    231      expect as a default input format the most usual format on each
    232      machine.  INPUT-FORMAT is a text string, the name of a particular
    233      format supported by the BFD libraries.  (You can list the
    234      available binary formats with `objdump -i'.)  *Note BFD::.
    235 
    236      You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an
    237      unusual binary format.  You can also use `-b' to switch formats
    238      explicitly (when linking object files of different formats), by
    239      including `-b INPUT-FORMAT' before each group of object files in a
    240      particular format.
    241 
    242      The default format is taken from the environment variable
    243      `GNUTARGET'.  *Note Environment::.  You can also define the input
    244      format from a script, using the command `TARGET'; see *Note Format
    245      Commands::.
    246 
    247 `-c MRI-COMMANDFILE'
    248 `--mri-script=MRI-COMMANDFILE'
    249      For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, `ld' accepts script
    250      files written in an alternate, restricted command language,
    251      described in *Note MRI Compatible Script Files: MRI.  Introduce
    252      MRI script files with the option `-c'; use the `-T' option to run
    253      linker scripts written in the general-purpose `ld' scripting
    254      language.  If MRI-CMDFILE does not exist, `ld' looks for it in the
    255      directories specified by any `-L' options.
    256 
    257 `-d'
    258 `-dc'
    259 `-dp'
    260      These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported
    261      for compatibility with other linkers.  They assign space to common
    262      symbols even if a relocatable output file is specified (with
    263      `-r').  The script command `FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION' has the same
    264      effect.  *Note Miscellaneous Commands::.
    265 
    266 `--depaudit AUDITLIB'
    267 `-P AUDITLIB'
    268      Adds AUDITLIB to the `DT_DEPAUDIT' entry of the dynamic section.
    269      AUDITLIB is not checked for existence, nor will it use the
    270      DT_SONAME specified in the library.  If specified multiple times
    271      `DT_DEPAUDIT' will contain a colon separated list of audit
    272      interfaces to use.  This option is only meaningful on ELF
    273      platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.  The -P option is
    274      provided for Solaris compatibility.
    275 
    276 `-e ENTRY'
    277 `--entry=ENTRY'
    278      Use ENTRY as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
    279      program, rather than the default entry point.  If there is no
    280      symbol named ENTRY, the linker will try to parse ENTRY as a number,
    281      and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted
    282      in base 10; you may use a leading `0x' for base 16, or a leading
    283      `0' for base 8).  *Note Entry Point::, for a discussion of defaults
    284      and other ways of specifying the entry point.
    285 
    286 `--exclude-libs LIB,LIB,...'
    287      Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should
    288      not be automatically exported.  The library names may be delimited
    289      by commas or colons.  Specifying `--exclude-libs ALL' excludes
    290      symbols in all archive libraries from automatic export.  This
    291      option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port of the
    292      linker and for ELF targeted ports.  For i386 PE, symbols
    293      explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of
    294      this option.  For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this
    295      option will be treated as hidden.
    296 
    297 `--exclude-modules-for-implib MODULE,MODULE,...'
    298      Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which
    299      symbols should not be automatically exported, but which should be
    300      copied wholesale into the import library being generated during
    301      the link.  The module names may be delimited by commas or colons,
    302      and must match exactly the filenames used by `ld' to open the
    303      files; for archive members, this is simply the member name, but
    304      for object files the name listed must include and match precisely
    305      any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
    306      command-line.  This option is available only for the i386 PE
    307      targeted port of the linker.  Symbols explicitly listed in a .def
    308      file are still exported, regardless of this option.
    309 
    310 `-E'
    311 `--export-dynamic'
    312 `--no-export-dynamic'
    313      When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the `-E'
    314      option or the `--export-dynamic' option causes the linker to add
    315      all symbols to the dynamic symbol table.  The dynamic symbol table
    316      is the set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at
    317      run time.
    318 
    319      If you do not use either of these options (or use the
    320      `--no-export-dynamic' option to restore the default behavior), the
    321      dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols
    322      which are referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
    323 
    324      If you use `dlopen' to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
    325      back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
    326      dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
    327      linking the program itself.
    328 
    329      You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
    330      be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports
    331      it.  See the description of `--dynamic-list'.
    332 
    333      Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports.  PE
    334      targets support a similar function to export all symbols from a
    335      DLL or EXE; see the description of `--export-all-symbols' below.
    336 
    337 `-EB'
    338      Link big-endian objects.  This affects the default output format.
    339 
    340 `-EL'
    341      Link little-endian objects.  This affects the default output
    342      format.
    343 
    344 `-f NAME'
    345 `--auxiliary=NAME'
    346      When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY
    347      field to the specified name.  This tells the dynamic linker that
    348      the symbol table of the shared object should be used as an
    349      auxiliary filter on the symbol table of the shared object NAME.
    350 
    351      If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when
    352      you run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY
    353      field.  If the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter
    354      object, it will first check whether there is a definition in the
    355      shared object NAME.  If there is one, it will be used instead of
    356      the definition in the filter object.  The shared object NAME need
    357      not exist.  Thus the shared object NAME may be used to provide an
    358      alternative implementation of certain functions, perhaps for
    359      debugging or for machine specific performance.
    360 
    361      This option may be specified more than once.  The DT_AUXILIARY
    362      entries will be created in the order in which they appear on the
    363      command line.
    364 
    365 `-F NAME'
    366 `--filter=NAME'
    367      When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER
    368      field to the specified name.  This tells the dynamic linker that
    369      the symbol table of the shared object which is being created
    370      should be used as a filter on the symbol table of the shared
    371      object NAME.
    372 
    373      If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when
    374      you run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER
    375      field.  The dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the
    376      symbol table of the filter object as usual, but it will actually
    377      link to the definitions found in the shared object NAME.  Thus the
    378      filter object can be used to select a subset of the symbols
    379      provided by the object NAME.
    380 
    381      Some older linkers used the `-F' option throughout a compilation
    382      toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and
    383      output object files.  The GNU linker uses other mechanisms for
    384      this purpose: the `-b', `--format', `--oformat' options, the
    385      `TARGET' command in linker scripts, and the `GNUTARGET'
    386      environment variable.  The GNU linker will ignore the `-F' option
    387      when not creating an ELF shared object.
    388 
    389 `-fini=NAME'
    390      When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when
    391      the executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to
    392      the address of the function.  By default, the linker uses `_fini'
    393      as the function to call.
    394 
    395 `-g'
    396      Ignored.  Provided for compatibility with other tools.
    397 
    398 `-G VALUE'
    399 `--gpsize=VALUE'
    400      Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP
    401      register to SIZE.  This is only meaningful for object file formats
    402      such as MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects
    403      into different sections.  This is ignored for other object file
    404      formats.
    405 
    406 `-h NAME'
    407 `-soname=NAME'
    408      When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME
    409      field to the specified name.  When an executable is linked with a
    410      shared object which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the
    411      executable is run the dynamic linker will attempt to load the
    412      shared object specified by the DT_SONAME field rather than the
    413      using the file name given to the linker.
    414 
    415 `-i'
    416      Perform an incremental link (same as option `-r').
    417 
    418 `-init=NAME'
    419      When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when
    420      the executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to
    421      the address of the function.  By default, the linker uses `_init'
    422      as the function to call.
    423 
    424 `-l NAMESPEC'
    425 `--library=NAMESPEC'
    426      Add the archive or object file specified by NAMESPEC to the list
    427      of files to link.  This option may be used any number of times.
    428      If NAMESPEC is of the form `:FILENAME', `ld' will search the
    429      library path for a file called FILENAME, otherwise it will search
    430      the library path for a file called `libNAMESPEC.a'.
    431 
    432      On systems which support shared libraries, `ld' may also search for
    433      files other than `libNAMESPEC.a'.  Specifically, on ELF and SunOS
    434      systems, `ld' will search a directory for a library called
    435      `libNAMESPEC.so' before searching for one called `libNAMESPEC.a'.
    436      (By convention, a `.so' extension indicates a shared library.)
    437      Note that this behavior does not apply to `:FILENAME', which
    438      always specifies a file called FILENAME.
    439 
    440      The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where
    441      it is specified on the command line.  If the archive defines a
    442      symbol which was undefined in some object which appeared before
    443      the archive on the command line, the linker will include the
    444      appropriate file(s) from the archive.  However, an undefined
    445      symbol in an object appearing later on the command line will not
    446      cause the linker to search the archive again.
    447 
    448      See the `-(' option for a way to force the linker to search
    449      archives multiple times.
    450 
    451      You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
    452 
    453      This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers.
    454      However, if you are using `ld' on AIX, note that it is different
    455      from the behaviour of the AIX linker.
    456 
    457 `-L SEARCHDIR'
    458 `--library-path=SEARCHDIR'
    459      Add path SEARCHDIR to the list of paths that `ld' will search for
    460      archive libraries and `ld' control scripts.  You may use this
    461      option any number of times.  The directories are searched in the
    462      order in which they are specified on the command line.
    463      Directories specified on the command line are searched before the
    464      default directories.  All `-L' options apply to all `-l' options,
    465      regardless of the order in which the options appear.  `-L' options
    466      do not affect how `ld' searches for a linker script unless `-T'
    467      option is specified.
    468 
    469      If SEARCHDIR begins with `=', then the `=' will be replaced by the
    470      "sysroot prefix", a path specified when the linker is configured.
    471 
    472      The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
    473      `-L') depends on which emulation mode `ld' is using, and in some
    474      cases also on how it was configured.  *Note Environment::.
    475 
    476      The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
    477      `SEARCH_DIR' command.  Directories specified this way are searched
    478      at the point in which the linker script appears in the command
    479      line.
    480 
    481 `-m EMULATION'
    482      Emulate the EMULATION linker.  You can list the available
    483      emulations with the `--verbose' or `-V' options.
    484 
    485      If the `-m' option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
    486      `LDEMULATION' environment variable, if that is defined.
    487 
    488      Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
    489      configured.
    490 
    491 `-M'
    492 `--print-map'
    493      Print a link map to the standard output.  A link map provides
    494      information about the link, including the following:
    495 
    496         * Where object files are mapped into memory.
    497 
    498         * How common symbols are allocated.
    499 
    500         * All archive members included in the link, with a mention of
    501           the symbol which caused the archive member to be brought in.
    502 
    503         * The values assigned to symbols.
    504 
    505           Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression
    506           which involves a reference to a previous value of the same
    507           symbol may not have correct result displayed in the link map.
    508           This is because the linker discards intermediate results and
    509           only retains the final value of an expression.  Under such
    510           circumstances the linker will display the final value
    511           enclosed by square brackets.  Thus for example a linker
    512           script containing:
    513 
    514                   foo = 1
    515                   foo = foo * 4
    516                   foo = foo + 8
    517 
    518           will produce the following output in the link map if the `-M'
    519           option is used:
    520 
    521                   0x00000001                foo = 0x1
    522                   [0x0000000c]                foo = (foo * 0x4)
    523                   [0x0000000c]                foo = (foo + 0x8)
    524 
    525           See *Note Expressions:: for more information about
    526           expressions in linker scripts.
    527 
    528 `-n'
    529 `--nmagic'
    530      Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against
    531      shared libraries.  If the output format supports Unix style magic
    532      numbers, mark the output as `NMAGIC'.
    533 
    534 `-N'
    535 `--omagic'
    536      Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable.  Also,
    537      do not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against
    538      shared libraries.  If the output format supports Unix style magic
    539      numbers, mark the output as `OMAGIC'. Note: Although a writable
    540      text section is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform
    541      to the format specification published by Microsoft.
    542 
    543 `--no-omagic'
    544      This option negates most of the effects of the `-N' option.  It
    545      sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment
    546      to be page-aligned.  Note - this option does not enable linking
    547      against shared libraries.  Use `-Bdynamic' for this.
    548 
    549 `-o OUTPUT'
    550 `--output=OUTPUT'
    551      Use OUTPUT as the name for the program produced by `ld'; if this
    552      option is not specified, the name `a.out' is used by default.  The
    553      script command `OUTPUT' can also specify the output file name.
    554 
    555 `-O LEVEL'
    556      If LEVEL is a numeric values greater than zero `ld' optimizes the
    557      output.  This might take significantly longer and therefore
    558      probably should only be enabled for the final binary.  At the
    559      moment this option only affects ELF shared library generation.
    560      Future releases of the linker may make more use of this option.
    561      Also currently there is no difference in the linker's behaviour
    562      for different non-zero values of this option.  Again this may
    563      change with future releases.
    564 
    565 `-q'
    566 `--emit-relocs'
    567      Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
    568      Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this
    569      information in order to perform correct modifications of
    570      executables.  This results in larger executables.
    571 
    572      This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
    573 
    574 `--force-dynamic'
    575      Force the output file to have dynamic sections.  This option is
    576      specific to VxWorks targets.
    577 
    578 `-r'
    579 `--relocatable'
    580      Generate relocatable output--i.e., generate an output file that
    581      can in turn serve as input to `ld'.  This is often called "partial
    582      linking".  As a side effect, in environments that support standard
    583      Unix magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic
    584      number to `OMAGIC'.  If this option is not specified, an absolute
    585      file is produced.  When linking C++ programs, this option _will
    586      not_ resolve references to constructors; to do that, use `-Ur'.
    587 
    588      When an input file does not have the same format as the output
    589      file, partial linking is only supported if that input file does
    590      not contain any relocations.  Different output formats can have
    591      further restrictions; for example some `a.out'-based formats do
    592      not support partial linking with input files in other formats at
    593      all.
    594 
    595      This option does the same thing as `-i'.
    596 
    597 `-R FILENAME'
    598 `--just-symbols=FILENAME'
    599      Read symbol names and their addresses from FILENAME, but do not
    600      relocate it or include it in the output.  This allows your output
    601      file to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined
    602      in other programs.  You may use this option more than once.
    603 
    604      For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the `-R' option is
    605      followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is
    606      treated as the `-rpath' option.
    607 
    608 `-s'
    609 `--strip-all'
    610      Omit all symbol information from the output file.
    611 
    612 `-S'
    613 `--strip-debug'
    614      Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the
    615      output file.
    616 
    617 `-t'
    618 `--trace'
    619      Print the names of the input files as `ld' processes them.
    620 
    621 `-T SCRIPTFILE'
    622 `--script=SCRIPTFILE'
    623      Use SCRIPTFILE as the linker script.  This script replaces `ld''s
    624      default linker script (rather than adding to it), so COMMANDFILE
    625      must specify everything necessary to describe the output file.
    626      *Note Scripts::.  If SCRIPTFILE does not exist in the current
    627      directory, `ld' looks for it in the directories specified by any
    628      preceding `-L' options.  Multiple `-T' options accumulate.
    629 
    630 `-dT SCRIPTFILE'
    631 `--default-script=SCRIPTFILE'
    632      Use SCRIPTFILE as the default linker script.  *Note Scripts::.
    633 
    634      This option is similar to the `--script' option except that
    635      processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
    636      command line has been processed.  This allows options placed after
    637      the `--default-script' option on the command line to affect the
    638      behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the
    639      linker command line cannot be directly controlled by the user.
    640      (eg because the command line is being constructed by another tool,
    641      such as `gcc').
    642 
    643 `-u SYMBOL'
    644 `--undefined=SYMBOL'
    645      Force SYMBOL to be entered in the output file as an undefined
    646      symbol.  Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
    647      modules from standard libraries.  `-u' may be repeated with
    648      different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols.
    649      This option is equivalent to the `EXTERN' linker script command.
    650 
    651 `-Ur'
    652      For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
    653      `-r': it generates relocatable output--i.e., an output file that
    654      can in turn serve as input to `ld'.  When linking C++ programs,
    655      `-Ur' _does_ resolve references to constructors, unlike `-r'.  It
    656      does not work to use `-Ur' on files that were themselves linked
    657      with `-Ur'; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
    658      be added to.  Use `-Ur' only for the last partial link, and `-r'
    659      for the others.
    660 
    661 `--unique[=SECTION]'
    662      Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
    663      SECTION, or if the optional wildcard SECTION argument is missing,
    664      for every orphan input section.  An orphan section is one not
    665      specifically mentioned in a linker script.  You may use this option
    666      multiple times on the command line;  It prevents the normal
    667      merging of input sections with the same name, overriding output
    668      section assignments in a linker script.
    669 
    670 `-v'
    671 `--version'
    672 `-V'
    673      Display the version number for `ld'.  The `-V' option also lists
    674      the supported emulations.
    675 
    676 `-x'
    677 `--discard-all'
    678      Delete all local symbols.
    679 
    680 `-X'
    681 `--discard-locals'
    682      Delete all temporary local symbols.  (These symbols start with
    683      system-specific local label prefixes, typically `.L' for ELF
    684      systems or `L' for traditional a.out systems.)
    685 
    686 `-y SYMBOL'
    687 `--trace-symbol=SYMBOL'
    688      Print the name of each linked file in which SYMBOL appears.  This
    689      option may be given any number of times.  On many systems it is
    690      necessary to prepend an underscore.
    691 
    692      This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your
    693      link but don't know where the reference is coming from.
    694 
    695 `-Y PATH'
    696      Add PATH to the default library search path.  This option exists
    697      for Solaris compatibility.
    698 
    699 `-z KEYWORD'
    700      The recognized keywords are:
    701     `combreloc'
    702           Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make
    703           dynamic symbol lookup caching possible.
    704 
    705     `defs'
    706           Disallows undefined symbols in object files.  Undefined
    707           symbols in shared libraries are still allowed.
    708 
    709     `execstack'
    710           Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
    711 
    712     `initfirst'
    713           This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
    714           It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will
    715           occur before the runtime initialization of any other objects
    716           brought into the process at the same time.  Similarly the
    717           runtime finalization of the object will occur after the
    718           runtime finalization of any other objects.
    719 
    720     `interpose'
    721           Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all
    722           symbols but the primary executable.
    723 
    724     `lazy'
    725           When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to
    726           tell the dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to
    727           the point when the function is called (lazy binding), rather
    728           than at load time.  Lazy binding is the default.
    729 
    730     `loadfltr'
    731           Marks  the object that its filters be processed immediately at
    732           runtime.
    733 
    734     `muldefs'
    735           Allows multiple definitions.
    736 
    737     `nocombreloc'
    738           Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
    739 
    740     `nocopyreloc'
    741           Disables production of copy relocs.
    742 
    743     `nodefaultlib'
    744           Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this
    745           object will ignore any default library search paths.
    746 
    747     `nodelete'
    748           Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
    749 
    750     `nodlopen'
    751           Marks the object not available to `dlopen'.
    752 
    753     `nodump'
    754           Marks the object can not be dumped by `dldump'.
    755 
    756     `noexecstack'
    757           Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
    758 
    759     `norelro'
    760           Don't create an ELF `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment header in the
    761           object.
    762 
    763     `now'
    764           When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to
    765           tell the dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the
    766           program is started, or when the shared library is linked to
    767           using dlopen, instead of deferring function call resolution
    768           to the point when the function is first called.
    769 
    770     `origin'
    771           Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
    772 
    773     `relro'
    774           Create an ELF `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment header in the object.
    775 
    776     `max-page-size=VALUE'
    777           Set the emulation maximum page size to VALUE.
    778 
    779     `common-page-size=VALUE'
    780           Set the emulation common page size to VALUE.
    781 
    782 
    783      Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
    784 
    785 `-( ARCHIVES -)'
    786 `--start-group ARCHIVES --end-group'
    787      The ARCHIVES should be a list of archive files.  They may be
    788      either explicit file names, or `-l' options.
    789 
    790      The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new
    791      undefined references are created.  Normally, an archive is
    792      searched only once in the order that it is specified on the
    793      command line.  If a symbol in that archive is needed to resolve an
    794      undefined symbol referred to by an object in an archive that
    795      appears later on the command line, the linker would not be able to
    796      resolve that reference.  By grouping the archives, they all be
    797      searched repeatedly until all possible references are resolved.
    798 
    799      Using this option has a significant performance cost.  It is best
    800      to use it only when there are unavoidable circular references
    801      between two or more archives.
    802 
    803 `--accept-unknown-input-arch'
    804 `--no-accept-unknown-input-arch'
    805      Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
    806      recognised.  The assumption is that the user knows what they are
    807      doing and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files.
    808      This was the default behaviour of the linker, before release
    809      2.14.  The default behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to
    810      reject such input files, and so the `--accept-unknown-input-arch'
    811      option has been added to restore the old behaviour.
    812 
    813 `--as-needed'
    814 `--no-as-needed'
    815      This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries
    816      mentioned on the command line after the `--as-needed' option.
    817      Normally the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic
    818      library mentioned on the command line, regardless of whether the
    819      library is actually needed or not.  `--as-needed' causes a
    820      DT_NEEDED tag to only be emitted for a library that satisfies an
    821      undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if the
    822      library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries
    823      linked up to that point, an undefined symbol reference from
    824      another dynamic library.  `--no-as-needed' restores the default
    825      behaviour.
    826 
    827 `--add-needed'
    828 `--no-add-needed'
    829      These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
    830      their names to the `--as-needed' and `--no-as-needed' options.
    831      They have been replaced by `--copy-dt-needed-entries' and
    832      `--no-copy-dt-needed-entries'.
    833 
    834 `-assert KEYWORD'
    835      This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
    836 
    837 `-Bdynamic'
    838 `-dy'
    839 `-call_shared'
    840      Link against dynamic libraries.  This is only meaningful on
    841      platforms for which shared libraries are supported.  This option
    842      is normally the default on such platforms.  The different variants
    843      of this option are for compatibility with various systems.  You
    844      may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
    845      library searching for `-l' options which follow it.
    846 
    847 `-Bgroup'
    848      Set the `DF_1_GROUP' flag in the `DT_FLAGS_1' entry in the dynamic
    849      section.  This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
    850      object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
    851      `--unresolved-symbols=report-all' is implied.  This option is only
    852      meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
    853 
    854 `-Bstatic'
    855 `-dn'
    856 `-non_shared'
    857 `-static'
    858      Do not link against shared libraries.  This is only meaningful on
    859      platforms for which shared libraries are supported.  The different
    860      variants of this option are for compatibility with various
    861      systems.  You may use this option multiple times on the command
    862      line: it affects library searching for `-l' options which follow
    863      it.  This option also implies `--unresolved-symbols=report-all'.
    864      This option can be used with `-shared'.  Doing so means that a
    865      shared library is being created but that all of the library's
    866      external references must be resolved by pulling in entries from
    867      static libraries.
    868 
    869 `-Bsymbolic'
    870      When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols
    871      to the definition within the shared library, if any.  Normally, it
    872      is possible for a program linked against a shared library to
    873      override the definition within the shared library.  This option is
    874      only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
    875 
    876 `-Bsymbolic-functions'
    877      When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
    878      symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.  This
    879      option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
    880      libraries.
    881 
    882 `--dynamic-list=DYNAMIC-LIST-FILE'
    883      Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker.  This is
    884      typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
    885      global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the
    886      definition within the shared library, or creating dynamically
    887      linked executables to specify a list of symbols which should be
    888      added to the symbol table in the executable.  This option is only
    889      meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
    890 
    891      The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node
    892      without scope and node name.  See *Note VERSION:: for more
    893      information.
    894 
    895 `--dynamic-list-data'
    896      Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
    897 
    898 `--dynamic-list-cpp-new'
    899      Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete.
    900      It is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
    901 
    902 `--dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo'
    903      Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type
    904      identification.
    905 
    906 `--check-sections'
    907 `--no-check-sections'
    908      Asks the linker _not_ to check section addresses after they have
    909      been assigned to see if there are any overlaps.  Normally the
    910      linker will perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it
    911      will produce suitable error messages.  The linker does know about,
    912      and does make allowances for sections in overlays.  The default
    913      behaviour can be restored by using the command line switch
    914      `--check-sections'.  Section overlap is not usually checked for
    915      relocatable links.  You can force checking in that case by using
    916      the `--check-sections' option.
    917 
    918 `--copy-dt-needed-entries'
    919 `--no-copy-dt-needed-entries'
    920      This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
    921      by DT_NEEDED tags _inside_ ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
    922      command line.  Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
    923      output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
    924      input dynamic library.  With `--copy-dt-needed-entries' specified
    925      on the command line however any dynamic libraries that follow it
    926      will have their DT_NEEDED entries added.  The default behaviour
    927      can be restored with `--no-copy-dt-needed-entries'.
    928 
    929      This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in
    930      dynamic libraries.  With `--copy-dt-needed-entries' dynamic
    931      libraries mentioned on the command line will be recursively
    932      searched, following their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in
    933      order to resolve symbols required by the output binary.  With the
    934      default setting however the searching of dynamic libraries that
    935      follow it will stop with the dynamic library itself.  No DT_NEEDED
    936      links will be traversed to resolve symbols.
    937 
    938 `--cref'
    939      Output a cross reference table.  If a linker map file is being
    940      generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
    941      Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
    942 
    943      The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
    944      easily processed by a script if necessary.  The symbols are
    945      printed out, sorted by name.  For each symbol, a list of file
    946      names is given.  If the symbol is defined, the first file listed
    947      is the location of the definition.  The remaining files contain
    948      references to the symbol.
    949 
    950 `--no-define-common'
    951      This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
    952      The script command `INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION' has the same effect.
    953      *Note Miscellaneous Commands::.
    954 
    955      The `--no-define-common' option allows decoupling the decision to
    956      assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice of the output
    957      file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type forces
    958      assigning addresses to Common symbols.  Using `--no-define-common'
    959      allows Common symbols that are referenced from a shared library to
    960      be assigned addresses only in the main program.  This eliminates
    961      the unused duplicate space in the shared library, and also
    962      prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
    963      duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized
    964      search paths for runtime symbol resolution.
    965 
    966 `--defsym=SYMBOL=EXPRESSION'
    967      Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
    968      address given by EXPRESSION.  You may use this option as many
    969      times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line.
    970      A limited form of arithmetic is supported for the EXPRESSION in
    971      this context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of
    972      an existing symbol, or use `+' and `-' to add or subtract
    973      hexadecimal constants or symbols.  If you need more elaborate
    974      expressions, consider using the linker command language from a
    975      script (*note Assignment: Symbol Definitions: Assignments.).
    976      _Note:_ there should be no white space between SYMBOL, the equals
    977      sign ("<=>"), and EXPRESSION.
    978 
    979 `--demangle[=STYLE]'
    980 `--no-demangle'
    981      These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error
    982      messages and other output.  When the linker is told to demangle,
    983      it tries to present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips
    984      leading underscores if they are used by the object file format,
    985      and converts C++ mangled symbol names into user readable names.
    986      Different compilers have different mangling styles.  The optional
    987      demangling style argument can be used to choose an appropriate
    988      demangling style for your compiler.  The linker will demangle by
    989      default unless the environment variable `COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE' is
    990      set.  These options may be used to override the default.
    991 
    992 `-IFILE'
    993 `--dynamic-linker=FILE'
    994      Set the name of the dynamic linker.  This is only meaningful when
    995      generating dynamically linked ELF executables.  The default dynamic
    996      linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what
    997      you are doing.
    998 
    999 `--fatal-warnings'
   1000 `--no-fatal-warnings'
   1001      Treat all warnings as errors.  The default behaviour can be
   1002      restored with the option `--no-fatal-warnings'.
   1003 
   1004 `--force-exe-suffix'
   1005      Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
   1006 
   1007      If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
   1008      `.exe' or `.dll' suffix, this option forces the linker to copy the
   1009      output file to one of the same name with a `.exe' suffix. This
   1010      option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a
   1011      Microsoft Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run
   1012      an image unless it ends in a `.exe' suffix.
   1013 
   1014 `--gc-sections'
   1015 `--no-gc-sections'
   1016      Enable garbage collection of unused input sections.  It is ignored
   1017      on targets that do not support this option.  The default behaviour
   1018      (of not performing this garbage collection) can be restored by
   1019      specifying `--no-gc-sections' on the command line.
   1020 
   1021      `--gc-sections' decides which input sections are used by examining
   1022      symbols and relocations.  The section containing the entry symbol
   1023      and all sections containing symbols undefined on the command-line
   1024      will be kept, as will sections containing symbols referenced by
   1025      dynamic objects.  Note that when building shared libraries, the
   1026      linker must assume that any visible symbol is referenced.  Once
   1027      this initial set of sections has been determined, the linker
   1028      recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
   1029      relocations.  See `--entry' and `--undefined'.
   1030 
   1031      This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with
   1032      option `-r').  In this case the root of symbols kept must be
   1033      explicitly specified either by an `--entry' or `--undefined'
   1034      option or by a `ENTRY' command in the linker script.
   1035 
   1036 `--print-gc-sections'
   1037 `--no-print-gc-sections'
   1038      List all sections removed by garbage collection.  The listing is
   1039      printed on stderr.  This option is only effective if garbage
   1040      collection has been enabled via the `--gc-sections') option.  The
   1041      default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed)
   1042      can be restored by specifying `--no-print-gc-sections' on the
   1043      command line.
   1044 
   1045 `--print-output-format'
   1046      Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
   1047      other command-line options).  This is the string that would appear
   1048      in an `OUTPUT_FORMAT' linker script command (*note File
   1049      Commands::).
   1050 
   1051 `--help'
   1052      Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output
   1053      and exit.
   1054 
   1055 `--target-help'
   1056      Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard
   1057      output and exit.
   1058 
   1059 `-Map=MAPFILE'
   1060      Print a link map to the file MAPFILE.  See the description of the
   1061      `-M' option, above.
   1062 
   1063 `--no-keep-memory'
   1064      `ld' normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
   1065      symbol tables of input files in memory.  This option tells `ld' to
   1066      instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables
   1067      as necessary.  This may be required if `ld' runs out of memory
   1068      space while linking a large executable.
   1069 
   1070 `--no-undefined'
   1071 `-z defs'
   1072      Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files.
   1073      This is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared
   1074      library.  The switch `--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined' controls the
   1075      behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
   1076      libraries being linked in.
   1077 
   1078 `--allow-multiple-definition'
   1079 `-z muldefs'
   1080      Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
   1081      report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and
   1082      the first definition will be used.
   1083 
   1084 `--allow-shlib-undefined'
   1085 `--no-allow-shlib-undefined'
   1086      Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.  This
   1087      switch is similar to `--no-undefined' except that it determines
   1088      the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a shared library
   1089      rather than a regular object file.  It does not affect how
   1090      undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
   1091 
   1092      The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
   1093      referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to
   1094      create an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being
   1095      used to create a shared library.
   1096 
   1097      The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
   1098      libraries specified at link time are that:
   1099 
   1100         * A shared library specified at link time may not be the same
   1101           as the one that is available at load time, so the symbol
   1102           might actually be resolvable at load time.
   1103 
   1104         * There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where
   1105           undefined symbols in shared libraries are normal.
   1106 
   1107           The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load
   1108           time to select whichever function is most appropriate for the
   1109           current architecture.  This is used, for example, to
   1110           dynamically select an appropriate memset function.
   1111 
   1112 `--no-undefined-version'
   1113      Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will
   1114      ignore it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version
   1115      and a fatal error will be issued instead.
   1116 
   1117 `--default-symver'
   1118      Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for
   1119      unversioned exported symbols.
   1120 
   1121 `--default-imported-symver'
   1122      Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for
   1123      unversioned imported symbols.
   1124 
   1125 `--no-warn-mismatch'
   1126      Normally `ld' will give an error if you try to link together input
   1127      files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they
   1128      have been compiled for different processors or for different
   1129      endiannesses.  This option tells `ld' that it should silently
   1130      permit such possible errors.  This option should only be used with
   1131      care, in cases when you have taken some special action that
   1132      ensures that the linker errors are inappropriate.
   1133 
   1134 `--no-warn-search-mismatch'
   1135      Normally `ld' will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
   1136      library during a library search.  This option silences the warning.
   1137 
   1138 `--no-whole-archive'
   1139      Turn off the effect of the `--whole-archive' option for subsequent
   1140      archive files.
   1141 
   1142 `--noinhibit-exec'
   1143      Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
   1144      Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it
   1145      encounters errors during the link process; it exits without
   1146      writing an output file when it issues any error whatsoever.
   1147 
   1148 `-nostdlib'
   1149      Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
   1150      command line.  Library directories specified in linker scripts
   1151      (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are
   1152      ignored.
   1153 
   1154 `--oformat=OUTPUT-FORMAT'
   1155      `ld' may be configured to support more than one kind of object
   1156      file.  If your `ld' is configured this way, you can use the
   1157      `--oformat' option to specify the binary format for the output
   1158      object file.  Even when `ld' is configured to support alternative
   1159      object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as `ld'
   1160      should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
   1161      usual format on each machine.  OUTPUT-FORMAT is a text string, the
   1162      name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries.  (You
   1163      can list the available binary formats with `objdump -i'.)  The
   1164      script command `OUTPUT_FORMAT' can also specify the output format,
   1165      but this option overrides it.  *Note BFD::.
   1166 
   1167 `-pie'
   1168 `--pic-executable'
   1169      Create a position independent executable.  This is currently only
   1170      supported on ELF platforms.  Position independent executables are
   1171      similar to shared libraries in that they are relocated by the
   1172      dynamic linker to the virtual address the OS chooses for them
   1173      (which can vary between invocations).  Like normal dynamically
   1174      linked executables they can be executed and symbols defined in the
   1175      executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
   1176 
   1177 `-qmagic'
   1178      This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
   1179 
   1180 `-Qy'
   1181      This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
   1182 
   1183 `--relax'
   1184 `--no-relax'
   1185      An option with machine dependent effects.  This option is only
   1186      supported on a few targets.  *Note `ld' and the H8/300: H8/300.
   1187      *Note `ld' and the Intel 960 family: i960.  *Note `ld' and Xtensa
   1188      Processors: Xtensa.  *Note `ld' and the 68HC11 and 68HC12:
   1189      M68HC11/68HC12.  *Note `ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support:
   1190      PowerPC ELF32.
   1191 
   1192      On some platforms the `--relax' option performs target specific,
   1193      global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
   1194      addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
   1195      synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
   1196      instructions, and combinig constant values.
   1197 
   1198      On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make
   1199      symbolic debugging of the resulting executable impossible.  This
   1200      is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
   1201      family of processors.
   1202 
   1203      On platforms where this is not supported, `--relax' is accepted,
   1204      but ignored.
   1205 
   1206      On platforms where `--relax' is accepted the option `--no-relax'
   1207      can be used to disable the feature.
   1208 
   1209 `--retain-symbols-file=FILENAME'
   1210      Retain _only_ the symbols listed in the file FILENAME, discarding
   1211      all others.  FILENAME is simply a flat file, with one symbol name
   1212      per line.  This option is especially useful in environments (such
   1213      as VxWorks) where a large global symbol table is accumulated
   1214      gradually, to conserve run-time memory.
   1215 
   1216      `--retain-symbols-file' does _not_ discard undefined symbols, or
   1217      symbols needed for relocations.
   1218 
   1219      You may only specify `--retain-symbols-file' once in the command
   1220      line.  It overrides `-s' and `-S'.
   1221 
   1222 `-rpath=DIR'
   1223      Add a directory to the runtime library search path.  This is used
   1224      when linking an ELF executable with shared objects.  All `-rpath'
   1225      arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which
   1226      uses them to locate shared objects at runtime.  The `-rpath'
   1227      option is also used when locating shared objects which are needed
   1228      by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see the
   1229      description of the `-rpath-link' option.  If `-rpath' is not used
   1230      when linking an ELF executable, the contents of the environment
   1231      variable `LD_RUN_PATH' will be used if it is defined.
   1232 
   1233      The `-rpath' option may also be used on SunOS.  By default, on
   1234      SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
   1235      `-L' options it is given.  If a `-rpath' option is used, the
   1236      runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the `-rpath'
   1237      options, ignoring the `-L' options.  This can be useful when using
   1238      gcc, which adds many `-L' options which may be on NFS mounted file
   1239      systems.
   1240 
   1241      For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the `-R' option is
   1242      followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is
   1243      treated as the `-rpath' option.
   1244 
   1245 `-rpath-link=DIR'
   1246      When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another.
   1247      This happens when an `ld -shared' link includes a shared library
   1248      as one of the input files.
   1249 
   1250      When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a
   1251      non-shared, non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to
   1252      locate the required shared library and include it in the link, if
   1253      it is not included explicitly.  In such a case, the `-rpath-link'
   1254      option specifies the first set of directories to search.  The
   1255      `-rpath-link' option may specify a sequence of directory names
   1256      either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
   1257      appearing multiple times.
   1258 
   1259      This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search
   1260      path that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In
   1261      such a case it is possible to use unintentionally a different
   1262      search path than the runtime linker would do.
   1263 
   1264      The linker uses the following search paths to locate required
   1265      shared libraries:
   1266        1. Any directories specified by `-rpath-link' options.
   1267 
   1268        2. Any directories specified by `-rpath' options.  The difference
   1269           between `-rpath' and `-rpath-link' is that directories
   1270           specified by `-rpath' options are included in the executable
   1271           and used at runtime, whereas the `-rpath-link' option is only
   1272           effective at link time. Searching `-rpath' in this way is
   1273           only supported by native linkers and cross linkers which have
   1274           been configured with the `--with-sysroot' option.
   1275 
   1276        3. On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the `-rpath' and
   1277           `-rpath-link' options were not used, search the contents of
   1278           the environment variable `LD_RUN_PATH'.
   1279 
   1280        4. On SunOS, if the `-rpath' option was not used, search any
   1281           directories specified using `-L' options.
   1282 
   1283        5. For a native linker, the search the contents of the
   1284           environment variable `LD_LIBRARY_PATH'.
   1285 
   1286        6. For a native ELF linker, the directories in `DT_RUNPATH' or
   1287           `DT_RPATH' of a shared library are searched for shared
   1288           libraries needed by it. The `DT_RPATH' entries are ignored if
   1289           `DT_RUNPATH' entries exist.
   1290 
   1291        7. The default directories, normally `/lib' and `/usr/lib'.
   1292 
   1293        8. For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file
   1294           `/etc/ld.so.conf' exists, the list of directories found in
   1295           that file.
   1296 
   1297      If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue
   1298      a warning and continue with the link.
   1299 
   1300 `-shared'
   1301 `-Bshareable'
   1302      Create a shared library.  This is currently only supported on ELF,
   1303      XCOFF and SunOS platforms.  On SunOS, the linker will
   1304      automatically create a shared library if the `-e' option is not
   1305      used and there are undefined symbols in the link.
   1306 
   1307 `--sort-common'
   1308 `--sort-common=ascending'
   1309 `--sort-common=descending'
   1310      This option tells `ld' to sort the common symbols by alignment in
   1311      ascending or descending order when it places them in the
   1312      appropriate output sections.  The symbol alignments considered are
   1313      sixteen-byte or larger, eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and
   1314      one-byte. This is to prevent gaps between symbols due to alignment
   1315      constraints.  If no sorting order is specified, then descending
   1316      order is assumed.
   1317 
   1318 `--sort-section=name'
   1319      This option will apply `SORT_BY_NAME' to all wildcard section
   1320      patterns in the linker script.
   1321 
   1322 `--sort-section=alignment'
   1323      This option will apply `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' to all wildcard section
   1324      patterns in the linker script.
   1325 
   1326 `--split-by-file[=SIZE]'
   1327      Similar to `--split-by-reloc' but creates a new output section for
   1328      each input file when SIZE is reached.  SIZE defaults to a size of
   1329      1 if not given.
   1330 
   1331 `--split-by-reloc[=COUNT]'
   1332      Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no
   1333      single output section in the file contains more than COUNT
   1334      relocations.  This is useful when generating huge relocatable
   1335      files for downloading into certain real time kernels with the COFF
   1336      object file format; since COFF cannot represent more than 65535
   1337      relocations in a single section.  Note that this will fail to work
   1338      with object file formats which do not support arbitrary sections.
   1339      The linker will not split up individual input sections for
   1340      redistribution, so if a single input section contains more than
   1341      COUNT relocations one output section will contain that many
   1342      relocations.  COUNT defaults to a value of 32768.
   1343 
   1344 `--stats'
   1345      Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker,
   1346      such as execution time and memory usage.
   1347 
   1348 `--sysroot=DIRECTORY'
   1349      Use DIRECTORY as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
   1350      configure-time default.  This option is only supported by linkers
   1351      that were configured using `--with-sysroot'.
   1352 
   1353 `--traditional-format'
   1354      For some targets, the output of `ld' is different in some ways from
   1355      the output of some existing linker.  This switch requests `ld' to
   1356      use the traditional format instead.
   1357 
   1358      For example, on SunOS, `ld' combines duplicate entries in the
   1359      symbol string table.  This can reduce the size of an output file
   1360      with full debugging information by over 30 percent.
   1361      Unfortunately, the SunOS `dbx' program can not read the resulting
   1362      program (`gdb' has no trouble).  The `--traditional-format' switch
   1363      tells `ld' to not combine duplicate entries.
   1364 
   1365 `--section-start=SECTIONNAME=ORG'
   1366      Locate a section in the output file at the absolute address given
   1367      by ORG.  You may use this option as many times as necessary to
   1368      locate multiple sections in the command line.  ORG must be a
   1369      single hexadecimal integer; for compatibility with other linkers,
   1370      you may omit the leading `0x' usually associated with hexadecimal
   1371      values.  _Note:_ there should be no white space between
   1372      SECTIONNAME, the equals sign ("<=>"), and ORG.
   1373 
   1374 `-Tbss=ORG'
   1375 `-Tdata=ORG'
   1376 `-Ttext=ORG'
   1377      Same as `--section-start', with `.bss', `.data' or `.text' as the
   1378      SECTIONNAME.
   1379 
   1380 `-Ttext-segment=ORG'
   1381      When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the
   1382      address of the first byte of the text segment.
   1383 
   1384 `--unresolved-symbols=METHOD'
   1385      Determine how to handle unresolved symbols.  There are four
   1386      possible values for `method':
   1387 
   1388     `ignore-all'
   1389           Do not report any unresolved symbols.
   1390 
   1391     `report-all'
   1392           Report all unresolved symbols.  This is the default.
   1393 
   1394     `ignore-in-object-files'
   1395           Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared
   1396           libraries, but ignore them if they come from regular object
   1397           files.
   1398 
   1399     `ignore-in-shared-libs'
   1400           Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object
   1401           files, but ignore them if they come from shared libraries.
   1402           This can be useful when creating a dynamic binary and it is
   1403           known that all the shared libraries that it should be
   1404           referencing are included on the linker's command line.
   1405 
   1406      The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be
   1407      controlled by the `--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined' option.
   1408 
   1409      Normally the linker will generate an error message for each
   1410      reported unresolved symbol but the option
   1411      `--warn-unresolved-symbols' can change this to a warning.
   1412 
   1413 `--dll-verbose'
   1414 `--verbose[=NUMBER]'
   1415      Display the version number for `ld' and list the linker emulations
   1416      supported.  Display which input files can and cannot be opened.
   1417      Display the linker script being used by the linker. If the
   1418      optional NUMBER argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be
   1419      displayed.
   1420 
   1421 `--version-script=VERSION-SCRIPTFILE'
   1422      Specify the name of a version script to the linker.  This is
   1423      typically used when creating shared libraries to specify
   1424      additional information about the version hierarchy for the library
   1425      being created.  This option is only fully supported on ELF
   1426      platforms which support shared libraries; see *Note VERSION::.  It
   1427      is partially supported on PE platforms, which can use version
   1428      scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
   1429      symbols marked `local' in the version script will not be exported.
   1430      *Note WIN32::.
   1431 
   1432 `--warn-common'
   1433      Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol
   1434      or with a symbol definition.  Unix linkers allow this somewhat
   1435      sloppy practise, but linkers on some other operating systems do
   1436      not.  This option allows you to find potential problems from
   1437      combining global symbols.  Unfortunately, some C libraries use
   1438      this practise, so you may get some warnings about symbols in the
   1439      libraries as well as in your programs.
   1440 
   1441      There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C
   1442      examples:
   1443 
   1444     `int i = 1;'
   1445           A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of
   1446           the output file.
   1447 
   1448     `extern int i;'
   1449           An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.  There
   1450           must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
   1451           variable somewhere.
   1452 
   1453     `int i;'
   1454           A common symbol.  If there are only (one or more) common
   1455           symbols for a variable, it goes in the uninitialized data
   1456           area of the output file.  The linker merges multiple common
   1457           symbols for the same variable into a single symbol.  If they
   1458           are of different sizes, it picks the largest size.  The
   1459           linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
   1460           a definition of the same variable.
   1461 
   1462      The `--warn-common' option can produce five kinds of warnings.
   1463      Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the
   1464      symbol just encountered, and the second describes the previous
   1465      symbol encountered with the same name.  One or both of the two
   1466      symbols will be a common symbol.
   1467 
   1468        1. Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is
   1469           already a definition for the symbol.
   1470                FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
   1471                   overridden by definition
   1472                FILE(SECTION): warning: defined here
   1473 
   1474        2. Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later
   1475           definition for the symbol is encountered.  This is the same
   1476           as the previous case, except that the symbols are encountered
   1477           in a different order.
   1478                FILE(SECTION): warning: definition of `SYMBOL'
   1479                   overriding common
   1480                FILE(SECTION): warning: common is here
   1481 
   1482        3. Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common
   1483           symbol.
   1484                FILE(SECTION): warning: multiple common
   1485                   of `SYMBOL'
   1486                FILE(SECTION): warning: previous common is here
   1487 
   1488        4. Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
   1489                FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
   1490                   overridden by larger common
   1491                FILE(SECTION): warning: larger common is here
   1492 
   1493        5. Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common
   1494           symbol.  This is the same as the previous case, except that
   1495           the symbols are encountered in a different order.
   1496                FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
   1497                   overriding smaller common
   1498                FILE(SECTION): warning: smaller common is here
   1499 
   1500 `--warn-constructors'
   1501      Warn if any global constructors are used.  This is only useful for
   1502      a few object file formats.  For formats like COFF or ELF, the
   1503      linker can not detect the use of global constructors.
   1504 
   1505 `--warn-multiple-gp'
   1506      Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output
   1507      file.  This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the
   1508      Alpha.  Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants
   1509      in a special section.  A special register (the global pointer)
   1510      points into the middle of this section, so that constants can be
   1511      loaded efficiently via a base-register relative addressing mode.
   1512      Since the offset in base-register relative mode is fixed and
   1513      relatively small (e.g., 16 bits), this limits the maximum size of
   1514      the constant pool.  Thus, in large programs, it is often necessary
   1515      to use multiple global pointer values in order to be able to
   1516      address all possible constants.  This option causes a warning to
   1517      be issued whenever this case occurs.
   1518 
   1519 `--warn-once'
   1520      Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per
   1521      module which refers to it.
   1522 
   1523 `--warn-section-align'
   1524      Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
   1525      alignment.  Typically, the alignment will be set by an input
   1526      section.  The address will only be changed if it not explicitly
   1527      specified; that is, if the `SECTIONS' command does not specify a
   1528      start address for the section (*note SECTIONS::).
   1529 
   1530 `--warn-shared-textrel'
   1531      Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
   1532 
   1533 `--warn-alternate-em'
   1534      Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
   1535 
   1536 `--warn-unresolved-symbols'
   1537      If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the
   1538      option `--unresolved-symbols') it will normally generate an error.
   1539      This option makes it generate a warning instead.
   1540 
   1541 `--error-unresolved-symbols'
   1542      This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors
   1543      when it is reporting unresolved symbols.
   1544 
   1545 `--whole-archive'
   1546      For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
   1547      `--whole-archive' option, include every object file in the archive
   1548      in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required
   1549      object files.  This is normally used to turn an archive file into
   1550      a shared library, forcing every object to be included in the
   1551      resulting shared library.  This option may be used more than once.
   1552 
   1553      Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
   1554      about this option, so you have to use `-Wl,-whole-archive'.
   1555      Second, don't forget to use `-Wl,-no-whole-archive' after your
   1556      list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
   1557      your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
   1558 
   1559 `--wrap=SYMBOL'
   1560      Use a wrapper function for SYMBOL.  Any undefined reference to
   1561      SYMBOL will be resolved to `__wrap_SYMBOL'.  Any undefined
   1562      reference to `__real_SYMBOL' will be resolved to SYMBOL.
   1563 
   1564      This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function.  The
   1565      wrapper function should be called `__wrap_SYMBOL'.  If it wishes
   1566      to call the system function, it should call `__real_SYMBOL'.
   1567 
   1568      Here is a trivial example:
   1569 
   1570           void *
   1571           __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
   1572           {
   1573             printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
   1574             return __real_malloc (c);
   1575           }
   1576 
   1577      If you link other code with this file using `--wrap malloc', then
   1578      all calls to `malloc' will call the function `__wrap_malloc'
   1579      instead.  The call to `__real_malloc' in `__wrap_malloc' will call
   1580      the real `malloc' function.
   1581 
   1582      You may wish to provide a `__real_malloc' function as well, so that
   1583      links without the `--wrap' option will succeed.  If you do this,
   1584      you should not put the definition of `__real_malloc' in the same
   1585      file as `__wrap_malloc'; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
   1586      call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to `malloc'.
   1587 
   1588 `--eh-frame-hdr'
   1589      Request creation of `.eh_frame_hdr' section and ELF
   1590      `PT_GNU_EH_FRAME' segment header.
   1591 
   1592 `--no-ld-generated-unwind-info'
   1593      Request creation of `.eh_frame' unwind info for linker generated
   1594      code sections like PLT.  This option is on by default if linker
   1595      generated unwind info is supported.
   1596 
   1597 `--enable-new-dtags'
   1598 `--disable-new-dtags'
   1599      This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older
   1600      ELF systems may not understand them. If you specify
   1601      `--enable-new-dtags', the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
   1602      If you specify `--disable-new-dtags', no new dynamic tags will be
   1603      created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note
   1604      that those options are only available for ELF systems.
   1605 
   1606 `--hash-size=NUMBER'
   1607      Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
   1608      close to NUMBER.  Increasing this value can reduce the length of
   1609      time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
   1610      increasing the linker's memory requirements.  Similarly reducing
   1611      this value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of
   1612      speed.
   1613 
   1614 `--hash-style=STYLE'
   1615      Set the type of linker's hash table(s).  STYLE can be either
   1616      `sysv' for classic ELF `.hash' section, `gnu' for new style GNU
   1617      `.gnu.hash' section or `both' for both the classic ELF `.hash' and
   1618      new style GNU `.gnu.hash' hash tables.  The default is `sysv'.
   1619 
   1620 `--reduce-memory-overheads'
   1621      This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the
   1622      expense of linking speed.  This was introduced to select the old
   1623      O(n^2) algorithm for link map file generation, rather than the new
   1624      O(n) algorithm which uses about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
   1625 
   1626      Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size
   1627      to 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the
   1628      linker's run time.  This is not done however if the `--hash-size'
   1629      switch has been used.
   1630 
   1631      The `--reduce-memory-overheads' switch may be also be used to
   1632      enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
   1633 
   1634 `--build-id'
   1635 `--build-id=STYLE'
   1636      Request creation of `.note.gnu.build-id' ELF note section.  The
   1637      contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked file.
   1638      STYLE can be `uuid' to use 128 random bits, `sha1' to use a
   1639      160-bit SHA1 hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
   1640      `md5' to use a 128-bit MD5 hash on the normative parts of the
   1641      output contents, or `0xHEXSTRING' to use a chosen bit string
   1642      specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (`-' and `:'
   1643      characters between digit pairs are ignored).  If STYLE is omitted,
   1644      `sha1' is used.
   1645 
   1646      The `md5' and `sha1' styles produces an identifier that is always
   1647      the same in an identical output file, but will be unique among all
   1648      nonidentical output files.  It is not intended to be compared as a
   1649      checksum for the file's contents.  A linked file may be changed
   1650      later by other tools, but the build ID bit string identifying the
   1651      original linked file does not change.
   1652 
   1653      Passing `none' for STYLE disables the setting from any
   1654      `--build-id' options earlier on the command line.
   1655 
   1656 2.1.1 Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
   1657 -----------------------------------------
   1658 
   1659 The i386 PE linker supports the `-shared' option, which causes the
   1660 output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a normal
   1661 executable.  You should name the output `*.dll' when you use this
   1662 option.  In addition, the linker fully supports the standard `*.def'
   1663 files, which may be specified on the linker command line like an object
   1664 file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports symbols from, to
   1665 ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal object file).
   1666 
   1667    In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
   1668 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
   1669 PE target.  Options that take values may be separated from their values
   1670 by either a space or an equals sign.
   1671 
   1672 `--add-stdcall-alias'
   1673      If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@NN) will be exported
   1674      as-is and also with the suffix stripped.  [This option is specific
   1675      to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1676 
   1677 `--base-file FILE'
   1678      Use FILE as the name of a file in which to save the base addresses
   1679      of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with `dlltool'.
   1680      [This is an i386 PE specific option]
   1681 
   1682 `--dll'
   1683      Create a DLL instead of a regular executable.  You may also use
   1684      `-shared' or specify a `LIBRARY' in a given `.def' file.  [This
   1685      option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1686 
   1687 `--enable-long-section-names'
   1688 `--disable-long-section-names'
   1689      The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that
   1690      permits the use of section names longer than eight characters, the
   1691      normal limit for Coff.  By default, these names are only allowed
   1692      in object files, as fully-linked executable images do not carry
   1693      the Coff string table required to support the longer names.  As a
   1694      GNU extension, it is possible to allow their use in executable
   1695      images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)  disallow it in
   1696      object files, by using these two options.  Executable images
   1697      generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard,
   1698      carrying as they do a string table, and may generate confusing
   1699      output when examined with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file
   1700      viewers and dumpers.  However, GDB relies on the use of PE long
   1701      section names to find Dwarf-2 debug information sections in an
   1702      executable image at runtime, and so if neither option is specified
   1703      on the command-line, `ld' will enable long section names,
   1704      overriding the default and technically correct behaviour, when it
   1705      finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
   1706      image and not stripping symbols.  [This option is valid for all PE
   1707      targeted ports of the linker]
   1708 
   1709 `--enable-stdcall-fixup'
   1710 `--disable-stdcall-fixup'
   1711      If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt
   1712      to do "fuzzy linking" by looking for another defined symbol that
   1713      differs only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall)
   1714      and will resolve that symbol by linking to the match.  For
   1715      example, the undefined symbol `_foo' might be linked to the
   1716      function `_foo@12', or the undefined symbol `_bar@16' might be
   1717      linked to the function `_bar'.  When the linker does this, it
   1718      prints a warning, since it normally should have failed to link,
   1719      but sometimes import libraries generated from third-party dlls may
   1720      need this feature to be usable.  If you specify
   1721      `--enable-stdcall-fixup', this feature is fully enabled and
   1722      warnings are not printed.  If you specify
   1723      `--disable-stdcall-fixup', this feature is disabled and such
   1724      mismatches are considered to be errors.  [This option is specific
   1725      to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1726 
   1727 `--leading-underscore'
   1728 `--no-leading-underscore'
   1729      For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is
   1730      defined in target's description. By this option it is possible to
   1731      disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
   1732 
   1733 `--export-all-symbols'
   1734      If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL
   1735      will be exported by the DLL.  Note that this is the default if
   1736      there otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols.  When symbols are
   1737      explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via
   1738      function attributes, the default is to not export anything else
   1739      unless this option is given.  Note that the symbols `DllMain@12',
   1740      `DllEntryPoint@0', `DllMainCRTStartup@12', and `impure_ptr' will
   1741      not be automatically exported.  Also, symbols imported from other
   1742      DLLs will not be re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the
   1743      DLL's internal layout such as those beginning with `_head_' or
   1744      ending with `_iname'.  In addition, no symbols from `libgcc',
   1745      `libstd++', `libmingw32', or `crtX.o' will be exported.  Symbols
   1746      whose names begin with `__rtti_' or `__builtin_' will not be
   1747      exported, to help with C++ DLLs.  Finally, there is an extensive
   1748      list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported (obviously,
   1749      this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).  These
   1750      cygwin-excludes are: `_cygwin_dll_entry@12',
   1751      `_cygwin_crt0_common@8', `_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@12',
   1752      `_fmode', `_impure_ptr', `cygwin_attach_dll', `cygwin_premain0',
   1753      `cygwin_premain1', `cygwin_premain2', `cygwin_premain3', and
   1754      `environ'.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
   1755      of the linker]
   1756 
   1757 `--exclude-symbols SYMBOL,SYMBOL,...'
   1758      Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
   1759      exported.  The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
   1760      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1761      linker]
   1762 
   1763 `--exclude-all-symbols'
   1764      Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.  [This
   1765      option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1766 
   1767 `--file-alignment'
   1768      Specify the file alignment.  Sections in the file will always
   1769      begin at file offsets which are multiples of this number.  This
   1770      defaults to 512.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted
   1771      port of the linker]
   1772 
   1773 `--heap RESERVE'
   1774 `--heap RESERVE,COMMIT'
   1775      Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally
   1776      commit) to be used as heap for this program.  The default is 1Mb
   1777      reserved, 4K committed.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
   1778      targeted port of the linker]
   1779 
   1780 `--image-base VALUE'
   1781      Use VALUE as the base address of your program or dll.  This is the
   1782      lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
   1783      is loaded.  To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance
   1784      of your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not
   1785      overlap any other dlls.  The default is 0x400000 for executables,
   1786      and 0x10000000 for dlls.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
   1787      targeted port of the linker]
   1788 
   1789 `--kill-at'
   1790      If given, the stdcall suffixes (@NN) will be stripped from symbols
   1791      before they are exported.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
   1792      targeted port of the linker]
   1793 
   1794 `--large-address-aware'
   1795      If given, the appropriate bit in the "Characteristics" field of
   1796      the COFF header is set to indicate that this executable supports
   1797      virtual addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.  This should be used
   1798      in conjunction with the /3GB or /USERVA=VALUE megabytes switch in
   1799      the "[operating systems]" section of the BOOT.INI.  Otherwise,
   1800      this bit has no effect.  [This option is specific to PE targeted
   1801      ports of the linker]
   1802 
   1803 `--major-image-version VALUE'
   1804      Sets the major number of the "image version".  Defaults to 1.
   1805      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1806      linker]
   1807 
   1808 `--major-os-version VALUE'
   1809      Sets the major number of the "os version".  Defaults to 4.  [This
   1810      option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1811 
   1812 `--major-subsystem-version VALUE'
   1813      Sets the major number of the "subsystem version".  Defaults to 4.
   1814      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1815      linker]
   1816 
   1817 `--minor-image-version VALUE'
   1818      Sets the minor number of the "image version".  Defaults to 0.
   1819      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1820      linker]
   1821 
   1822 `--minor-os-version VALUE'
   1823      Sets the minor number of the "os version".  Defaults to 0.  [This
   1824      option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1825 
   1826 `--minor-subsystem-version VALUE'
   1827      Sets the minor number of the "subsystem version".  Defaults to 0.
   1828      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1829      linker]
   1830 
   1831 `--output-def FILE'
   1832      The linker will create the file FILE which will contain a DEF file
   1833      corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating.  This DEF file
   1834      (which should be called `*.def') may be used to create an import
   1835      library with `dlltool' or may be used as a reference to
   1836      automatically or implicitly exported symbols.  [This option is
   1837      specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1838 
   1839 `--out-implib FILE'
   1840      The linker will create the file FILE which will contain an import
   1841      lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This import
   1842      lib (which should be called `*.dll.a' or `*.a' may be used to link
   1843      clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour makes it
   1844      possible to skip a separate `dlltool' import library creation step.
   1845      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1846      linker]
   1847 
   1848 `--enable-auto-image-base'
   1849      Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is
   1850      specified using the `--image-base' argument.  By using a hash
   1851      generated from the dllname to create unique image bases for each
   1852      DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
   1853      execution are avoided.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
   1854      targeted port of the linker]
   1855 
   1856 `--disable-auto-image-base'
   1857      Do not automatically generate a unique image base.  If there is no
   1858      user-specified image base (`--image-base') then use the platform
   1859      default.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of
   1860      the linker]
   1861 
   1862 `--dll-search-prefix STRING'
   1863      When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
   1864      search for `<string><basename>.dll' in preference to
   1865      `lib<basename>.dll'. This behaviour allows easy distinction
   1866      between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
   1867      uwin, pw, etc.  For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
   1868      `--dll-search-prefix=cyg'.  [This option is specific to the i386
   1869      PE targeted port of the linker]
   1870 
   1871 `--enable-auto-import'
   1872      Do sophisticated linking of `_symbol' to `__imp__symbol' for DATA
   1873      imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
   1874      building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use
   1875      of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the
   1876      image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
   1877      PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
   1878 
   1879      Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
   1880      data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
   1881      placed into the .data section instead.  This is in order to work
   1882      around a problem with consts that is described here:
   1883      http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
   1884 
   1885      Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' - but sometimes you
   1886      may see this message:
   1887 
   1888      "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
   1889      documentation for ld's `--enable-auto-import' for details."
   1890 
   1891      This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
   1892      ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables
   1893      only allow one).  Instances where this may occur include accesses
   1894      to member fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well
   1895      as using a constant index into an array variable imported from a
   1896      DLL.  Any multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may
   1897      trigger this error condition.  However, regardless of the exact
   1898      data type of the offending exported variable, ld will always
   1899      detect it, issue the warning, and exit.
   1900 
   1901      There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of
   1902      the data type of the exported variable:
   1903 
   1904      One way is to use -enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves
   1905      the task of adjusting references in your client code for runtime
   1906      environment, so this method works only when runtime environment
   1907      supports this feature.
   1908 
   1909      A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a
   1910      variable - that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time.
   1911      For arrays, there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the
   1912      array's address) a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a
   1913      variable.  Thus:
   1914 
   1915           extern type extern_array[];
   1916           extern_array[1] -->
   1917              { volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] }
   1918 
   1919      or
   1920 
   1921           extern type extern_array[];
   1922           extern_array[1] -->
   1923              { volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] }
   1924 
   1925      For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
   1926      is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...)
   1927      variable:
   1928 
   1929           extern struct s extern_struct;
   1930           extern_struct.field -->
   1931              { volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field }
   1932 
   1933      or
   1934 
   1935           extern long long extern_ll;
   1936           extern_ll -->
   1937             { volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll }
   1938 
   1939      A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
   1940      'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
   1941      `__declspec(dllimport)'.  However, in practise that requires using
   1942      compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are building a DLL,
   1943      building client code that will link to the DLL, or merely
   1944      building/linking to a static library.   In making the choice
   1945      between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
   1946      constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world
   1947      usage:
   1948 
   1949      Original:
   1950           --foo.h
   1951           extern int arr[];
   1952           --foo.c
   1953           #include "foo.h"
   1954           void main(int argc, char **argv){
   1955             printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
   1956           }
   1957 
   1958      Solution 1:
   1959           --foo.h
   1960           extern int arr[];
   1961           --foo.c
   1962           #include "foo.h"
   1963           void main(int argc, char **argv){
   1964             /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
   1965             volatile int *parr = arr;
   1966             printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
   1967           }
   1968 
   1969      Solution 2:
   1970           --foo.h
   1971           /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
   1972           #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
   1973             !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
   1974           #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
   1975           #else
   1976           #define FOO_IMPORT
   1977           #endif
   1978           extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
   1979           --foo.c
   1980           #include "foo.h"
   1981           void main(int argc, char **argv){
   1982             printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
   1983           }
   1984 
   1985      A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your library to
   1986      use a functional interface rather than a data interface for the
   1987      offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
   1988      functions).  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
   1989      of the linker]
   1990 
   1991 `--disable-auto-import'
   1992      Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of `_symbol' to
   1993      `__imp__symbol' for DATA imports from DLLs.  [This option is
   1994      specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1995 
   1996 `--enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc'
   1997      If your code contains expressions described in -enable-auto-import
   1998      section, that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this
   1999      switch will create a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which
   2000      can be used by runtime environment to adjust references to such
   2001      data in your client code.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
   2002      targeted port of the linker]
   2003 
   2004 `--disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc'
   2005      Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports
   2006      from DLLs.  This is the default.  [This option is specific to the
   2007      i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   2008 
   2009 `--enable-extra-pe-debug'
   2010      Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
   2011      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   2012      linker]
   2013 
   2014 `--section-alignment'
   2015      Sets the section alignment.  Sections in memory will always begin
   2016      at addresses which are a multiple of this number.  Defaults to
   2017      0x1000.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of
   2018      the linker]
   2019 
   2020 `--stack RESERVE'
   2021 `--stack RESERVE,COMMIT'
   2022      Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally
   2023      commit) to be used as stack for this program.  The default is 2Mb
   2024      reserved, 4K committed.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
   2025      targeted port of the linker]
   2026 
   2027 `--subsystem WHICH'
   2028 `--subsystem WHICH:MAJOR'
   2029 `--subsystem WHICH:MAJOR.MINOR'
   2030      Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute.  The
   2031      legal values for WHICH are `native', `windows', `console',
   2032      `posix', and `xbox'.  You may optionally set the subsystem version
   2033      also.  Numeric values are also accepted for WHICH.  [This option
   2034      is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   2035 
   2036      The following options set flags in the `DllCharacteristics' field
   2037      of the PE file header: [These options are specific to PE targeted
   2038      ports of the linker]
   2039 
   2040 `--dynamicbase'
   2041      The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
   2042      randomization (ASLR).  This feature was introduced with MS Windows
   2043      Vista for i386 PE targets.
   2044 
   2045 `--forceinteg'
   2046      Code integrity checks are enforced.
   2047 
   2048 `--nxcompat'
   2049      The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.  This
   2050      feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
   2051 
   2052 `--no-isolation'
   2053      Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
   2054 
   2055 `--no-seh'
   2056      The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from this
   2057      image.
   2058 
   2059 `--no-bind'
   2060      Do not bind this image.
   2061 
   2062 `--wdmdriver'
   2063      The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
   2064 
   2065 `--tsaware'
   2066      The image is Terminal Server aware.
   2067 
   2068 
   2069 2.1.2 Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
   2070 ---------------------------------------------
   2071 
   2072 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support
   2073 shared libraries.  Each shared library in the system needs to have a
   2074 unique index; all executables use an index of 0.
   2075 
   2076 `--dsbt-size SIZE'
   2077      This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current
   2078      executable or shared library to SIZE.  The default is to create a
   2079      table with 64 entries.
   2080 
   2081 `--dsbt-index INDEX'
   2082      This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or
   2083      shared library to INDEX.  The default is 0, which is appropriate
   2084      for generating executables.  If a shared library is generated with
   2085      a DSBT index of 0, the `R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX' relocs are copied into
   2086      the output file.
   2087 
   2088      The `--no-merge-exidx-entries' switch disables the merging of
   2089      adjacent exidx entries in frame unwind info.
   2090 
   2091 
   2092 2.1.3 Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
   2093 ------------------------------------------------------------
   2094 
   2095 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
   2096 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
   2097 
   2098 `--no-trampoline'
   2099      This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a
   2100      trampoline is generated for each far function which is called
   2101      using a `jsr' instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far
   2102      function is taken).
   2103 
   2104 `--bank-window NAME'
   2105      This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region
   2106      in the `MEMORY' specification that describes the memory bank
   2107      window.  The definition of such region is then used by the linker
   2108      to compute paging and addresses within the memory window.
   2109 
   2110 
   2111 2.1.4 Options specific to Motorola 68K target
   2112 ---------------------------------------------
   2113 
   2114 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT
   2115 generation when linking for 68K targets.
   2116 
   2117 `--got=TYPE'
   2118      This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
   2119      TYPE should be one of `single', `negative', `multigot' or
   2120      `target'.  For more information refer to the Info entry for `ld'.
   2121 
   2122 
   2123 
   2124 File: ld.info,  Node: Environment,  Prev: Options,  Up: Invocation
   2125 
   2126 2.2 Environment Variables
   2127 =========================
   2128 
   2129 You can change the behaviour of `ld' with the environment variables
   2130 `GNUTARGET', `LDEMULATION' and `COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE'.
   2131 
   2132    `GNUTARGET' determines the input-file object format if you don't use
   2133 `-b' (or its synonym `--format').  Its value should be one of the BFD
   2134 names for an input format (*note BFD::).  If there is no `GNUTARGET' in
   2135 the environment, `ld' uses the natural format of the target. If
   2136 `GNUTARGET' is set to `default' then BFD attempts to discover the input
   2137 format by examining binary input files; this method often succeeds, but
   2138 there are potential ambiguities, since there is no method of ensuring
   2139 that the magic number used to specify object-file formats is unique.
   2140 However, the configuration procedure for BFD on each system places the
   2141 conventional format for that system first in the search-list, so
   2142 ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
   2143 
   2144    `LDEMULATION' determines the default emulation if you don't use the
   2145 `-m' option.  The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
   2146 behaviour, particularly the default linker script.  You can list the
   2147 available emulations with the `--verbose' or `-V' options.  If the `-m'
   2148 option is not used, and the `LDEMULATION' environment variable is not
   2149 defined, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
   2150 configured.
   2151 
   2152    Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols.  However, if
   2153 `COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE' is set in the environment, then it will default
   2154 to not demangling symbols.  This environment variable is used in a
   2155 similar fashion by the `gcc' linker wrapper program.  The default may
   2156 be overridden by the `--demangle' and `--no-demangle' options.
   2157 
   2158 
   2159 File: ld.info,  Node: Scripts,  Next: Machine Dependent,  Prev: Invocation,  Up: Top
   2160 
   2161 3 Linker Scripts
   2162 ****************
   2163 
   2164 Every link is controlled by a "linker script".  This script is written
   2165 in the linker command language.
   2166 
   2167    The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the
   2168 sections in the input files should be mapped into the output file, and
   2169 to control the memory layout of the output file.  Most linker scripts
   2170 do nothing more than this.  However, when necessary, the linker script
   2171 can also direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the
   2172 commands described below.
   2173 
   2174    The linker always uses a linker script.  If you do not supply one
   2175 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
   2176 linker executable.  You can use the `--verbose' command line option to
   2177 display the default linker script.  Certain command line options, such
   2178 as `-r' or `-N', will affect the default linker script.
   2179 
   2180    You may supply your own linker script by using the `-T' command line
   2181 option.  When you do this, your linker script will replace the default
   2182 linker script.
   2183 
   2184    You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input
   2185 files to the linker, as though they were files to be linked.  *Note
   2186 Implicit Linker Scripts::.
   2187 
   2188 * Menu:
   2189 
   2190 * Basic Script Concepts::	Basic Linker Script Concepts
   2191 * Script Format::		Linker Script Format
   2192 * Simple Example::		Simple Linker Script Example
   2193 * Simple Commands::		Simple Linker Script Commands
   2194 * Assignments::			Assigning Values to Symbols
   2195 * SECTIONS::			SECTIONS Command
   2196 * MEMORY::			MEMORY Command
   2197 * PHDRS::			PHDRS Command
   2198 * VERSION::			VERSION Command
   2199 * Expressions::			Expressions in Linker Scripts
   2200 * Implicit Linker Scripts::	Implicit Linker Scripts
   2201 
   2202 
   2203 File: ld.info,  Node: Basic Script Concepts,  Next: Script Format,  Up: Scripts
   2204 
   2205 3.1 Basic Linker Script Concepts
   2206 ================================
   2207 
   2208 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
   2209 describe the linker script language.
   2210 
   2211    The linker combines input files into a single output file.  The
   2212 output file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
   2213 "object file format".  Each file is called an "object file".  The
   2214 output file is often called an "executable", but for our purposes we
   2215 will also call it an object file.  Each object file has, among other
   2216 things, a list of "sections".  We sometimes refer to a section in an
   2217 input file as an "input section"; similarly, a section in the output
   2218 file is an "output section".
   2219 
   2220    Each section in an object file has a name and a size.  Most sections
   2221 also have an associated block of data, known as the "section contents".
   2222 A section may be marked as "loadable", which mean that the contents
   2223 should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.  A section
   2224 with no contents may be "allocatable", which means that an area in
   2225 memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be loaded
   2226 there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out).  A section which
   2227 is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort of
   2228 debugging information.
   2229 
   2230    Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses.  The
   2231 first is the "VMA", or virtual memory address.  This is the address the
   2232 section will have when the output file is run.  The second is the
   2233 "LMA", or load memory address.  This is the address at which the
   2234 section will be loaded.  In most cases the two addresses will be the
   2235 same.  An example of when they might be different is when a data section
   2236 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
   2237 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
   2238 based system).  In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
   2239 RAM address would be the VMA.
   2240 
   2241    You can see the sections in an object file by using the `objdump'
   2242 program with the `-h' option.
   2243 
   2244    Every object file also has a list of "symbols", known as the "symbol
   2245 table".  A symbol may be defined or undefined.  Each symbol has a name,
   2246 and each defined symbol has an address, among other information.  If
   2247 you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you will get a
   2248 defined symbol for every defined function and global or static
   2249 variable.  Every undefined function or global variable which is
   2250 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
   2251 
   2252    You can see the symbols in an object file by using the `nm' program,
   2253 or by using the `objdump' program with the `-t' option.
   2254 
   2255 
   2256 File: ld.info,  Node: Script Format,  Next: Simple Example,  Prev: Basic Script Concepts,  Up: Scripts
   2257 
   2258 3.2 Linker Script Format
   2259 ========================
   2260 
   2261 Linker scripts are text files.
   2262 
   2263    You write a linker script as a series of commands.  Each command is
   2264 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
   2265 symbol.  You may separate commands using semicolons.  Whitespace is
   2266 generally ignored.
   2267 
   2268    Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered
   2269 directly.  If the file name contains a character such as a comma which
   2270 would otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name
   2271 in double quotes.  There is no way to use a double quote character in a
   2272 file name.
   2273 
   2274    You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
   2275 `/*' and `*/'.  As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent to
   2276 whitespace.
   2277 
   2278 
   2279 File: ld.info,  Node: Simple Example,  Next: Simple Commands,  Prev: Script Format,  Up: Scripts
   2280 
   2281 3.3 Simple Linker Script Example
   2282 ================================
   2283 
   2284 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
   2285 
   2286    The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
   2287 `SECTIONS'.  You use the `SECTIONS' command to describe the memory
   2288 layout of the output file.
   2289 
   2290    The `SECTIONS' command is a powerful command.  Here we will describe
   2291 a simple use of it.  Let's assume your program consists only of code,
   2292 initialized data, and uninitialized data.  These will be in the
   2293 `.text', `.data', and `.bss' sections, respectively.  Let's assume
   2294 further that these are the only sections which appear in your input
   2295 files.
   2296 
   2297    For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
   2298 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000.  Here is a
   2299 linker script which will do that:
   2300      SECTIONS
   2301      {
   2302        . = 0x10000;
   2303        .text : { *(.text) }
   2304        . = 0x8000000;
   2305        .data : { *(.data) }
   2306        .bss : { *(.bss) }
   2307      }
   2308 
   2309    You write the `SECTIONS' command as the keyword `SECTIONS', followed
   2310 by a series of symbol assignments and output section descriptions
   2311 enclosed in curly braces.
   2312 
   2313    The first line inside the `SECTIONS' command of the above example
   2314 sets the value of the special symbol `.', which is the location
   2315 counter.  If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
   2316 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
   2317 current value of the location counter.  The location counter is then
   2318 incremented by the size of the output section.  At the start of the
   2319 `SECTIONS' command, the location counter has the value `0'.
   2320 
   2321    The second line defines an output section, `.text'.  The colon is
   2322 required syntax which may be ignored for now.  Within the curly braces
   2323 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
   2324 which should be placed into this output section.  The `*' is a wildcard
   2325 which matches any file name.  The expression `*(.text)' means all
   2326 `.text' input sections in all input files.
   2327 
   2328    Since the location counter is `0x10000' when the output section
   2329 `.text' is defined, the linker will set the address of the `.text'
   2330 section in the output file to be `0x10000'.
   2331 
   2332    The remaining lines define the `.data' and `.bss' sections in the
   2333 output file.  The linker will place the `.data' output section at
   2334 address `0x8000000'.  After the linker places the `.data' output
   2335 section, the value of the location counter will be `0x8000000' plus the
   2336 size of the `.data' output section.  The effect is that the linker will
   2337 place the `.bss' output section immediately after the `.data' output
   2338 section in memory.
   2339 
   2340    The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
   2341 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary.  In this
   2342 example, the specified addresses for the `.text' and `.data' sections
   2343 will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker may
   2344 have to create a small gap between the `.data' and `.bss' sections.
   2345 
   2346    That's it!  That's a simple and complete linker script.
   2347 
   2348 
   2349 File: ld.info,  Node: Simple Commands,  Next: Assignments,  Prev: Simple Example,  Up: Scripts
   2350 
   2351 3.4 Simple Linker Script Commands
   2352 =================================
   2353 
   2354 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
   2355 
   2356 * Menu:
   2357 
   2358 * Entry Point::			Setting the entry point
   2359 * File Commands::		Commands dealing with files
   2360 
   2361 * Format Commands::		Commands dealing with object file formats
   2362 
   2363 * REGION_ALIAS::		Assign alias names to memory regions
   2364 * Miscellaneous Commands::	Other linker script commands
   2365 
   2366 
   2367 File: ld.info,  Node: Entry Point,  Next: File Commands,  Up: Simple Commands
   2368 
   2369 3.4.1 Setting the Entry Point
   2370 -----------------------------
   2371 
   2372 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the "entry
   2373 point".  You can use the `ENTRY' linker script command to set the entry
   2374 point.  The argument is a symbol name:
   2375      ENTRY(SYMBOL)
   2376 
   2377    There are several ways to set the entry point.  The linker will set
   2378 the entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
   2379 stopping when one of them succeeds:
   2380    * the `-e' ENTRY command-line option;
   2381 
   2382    * the `ENTRY(SYMBOL)' command in a linker script;
   2383 
   2384    * the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined;  For many
   2385      targets this is `start', but PE and BeOS based systems for example
   2386      check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one
   2387      found.
   2388 
   2389    * the address of the first byte of the `.text' section, if present;
   2390 
   2391    * The address `0'.
   2392 
   2393 
   2394 File: ld.info,  Node: File Commands,  Next: Format Commands,  Prev: Entry Point,  Up: Simple Commands
   2395 
   2396 3.4.2 Commands Dealing with Files
   2397 ---------------------------------
   2398 
   2399 Several linker script commands deal with files.
   2400 
   2401 `INCLUDE FILENAME'
   2402      Include the linker script FILENAME at this point.  The file will
   2403      be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory
   2404      specified with the `-L' option.  You can nest calls to `INCLUDE'
   2405      up to 10 levels deep.
   2406 
   2407      You can place `INCLUDE' directives at the top level, in `MEMORY' or
   2408      `SECTIONS' commands, or in output section descriptions.
   2409 
   2410 `INPUT(FILE, FILE, ...)'
   2411 `INPUT(FILE FILE ...)'
   2412      The `INPUT' command directs the linker to include the named files
   2413      in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
   2414 
   2415      For example, if you always want to include `subr.o' any time you do
   2416      a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command
   2417      line, then you can put `INPUT (subr.o)' in your linker script.
   2418 
   2419      In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the
   2420      linker script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a `-T'
   2421      option.
   2422 
   2423      In case a "sysroot prefix" is configured, and the filename starts
   2424      with the `/' character, and the script being processed was located
   2425      inside the "sysroot prefix", the filename will be looked for in
   2426      the "sysroot prefix".  Otherwise, the linker will try to open the
   2427      file in the current directory.  If it is not found, the linker
   2428      will search through the archive library search path.  See the
   2429      description of `-L' in *Note Command Line Options: Options.
   2430 
   2431      If you use `INPUT (-lFILE)', `ld' will transform the name to
   2432      `libFILE.a', as with the command line argument `-l'.
   2433 
   2434      When you use the `INPUT' command in an implicit linker script, the
   2435      files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
   2436      script file is included.  This can affect archive searching.
   2437 
   2438 `GROUP(FILE, FILE, ...)'
   2439 `GROUP(FILE FILE ...)'
   2440      The `GROUP' command is like `INPUT', except that the named files
   2441      should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
   2442      new undefined references are created.  See the description of `-('
   2443      in *Note Command Line Options: Options.
   2444 
   2445 `AS_NEEDED(FILE, FILE, ...)'
   2446 `AS_NEEDED(FILE FILE ...)'
   2447      This construct can appear only inside of the `INPUT' or `GROUP'
   2448      commands, among other filenames.  The files listed will be handled
   2449      as if they appear directly in the `INPUT' or `GROUP' commands,
   2450      with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
   2451      when they are actually needed.  This construct essentially enables
   2452      `--as-needed' option for all the files listed inside of it and
   2453      restores previous `--as-needed' resp. `--no-as-needed' setting
   2454      afterwards.
   2455 
   2456 `OUTPUT(FILENAME)'
   2457      The `OUTPUT' command names the output file.  Using
   2458      `OUTPUT(FILENAME)' in the linker script is exactly like using `-o
   2459      FILENAME' on the command line (*note Command Line Options:
   2460      Options.).  If both are used, the command line option takes
   2461      precedence.
   2462 
   2463      You can use the `OUTPUT' command to define a default name for the
   2464      output file other than the usual default of `a.out'.
   2465 
   2466 `SEARCH_DIR(PATH)'
   2467      The `SEARCH_DIR' command adds PATH to the list of paths where `ld'
   2468      looks for archive libraries.  Using `SEARCH_DIR(PATH)' is exactly
   2469      like using `-L PATH' on the command line (*note Command Line
   2470      Options: Options.).  If both are used, then the linker will search
   2471      both paths.  Paths specified using the command line option are
   2472      searched first.
   2473 
   2474 `STARTUP(FILENAME)'
   2475      The `STARTUP' command is just like the `INPUT' command, except
   2476      that FILENAME will become the first input file to be linked, as
   2477      though it were specified first on the command line.  This may be
   2478      useful when using a system in which the entry point is always the
   2479      start of the first file.
   2480 
   2481 
   2482 File: ld.info,  Node: Format Commands,  Next: REGION_ALIAS,  Prev: File Commands,  Up: Simple Commands
   2483 
   2484 3.4.3 Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
   2485 -----------------------------------------------
   2486 
   2487 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
   2488 
   2489 `OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME)'
   2490 `OUTPUT_FORMAT(DEFAULT, BIG, LITTLE)'
   2491      The `OUTPUT_FORMAT' command names the BFD format to use for the
   2492      output file (*note BFD::).  Using `OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME)' is
   2493      exactly like using `--oformat BFDNAME' on the command line (*note
   2494      Command Line Options: Options.).  If both are used, the command
   2495      line option takes precedence.
   2496 
   2497      You can use `OUTPUT_FORMAT' with three arguments to use different
   2498      formats based on the `-EB' and `-EL' command line options.  This
   2499      permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
   2500      desired endianness.
   2501 
   2502      If neither `-EB' nor `-EL' are used, then the output format will
   2503      be the first argument, DEFAULT.  If `-EB' is used, the output
   2504      format will be the second argument, BIG.  If `-EL' is used, the
   2505      output format will be the third argument, LITTLE.
   2506 
   2507      For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target
   2508      uses this command:
   2509           OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
   2510      This says that the default format for the output file is
   2511      `elf32-bigmips', but if the user uses the `-EL' command line
   2512      option, the output file will be created in the `elf32-littlemips'
   2513      format.
   2514 
   2515 `TARGET(BFDNAME)'
   2516      The `TARGET' command names the BFD format to use when reading input
   2517      files.  It affects subsequent `INPUT' and `GROUP' commands.  This
   2518      command is like using `-b BFDNAME' on the command line (*note
   2519      Command Line Options: Options.).  If the `TARGET' command is used
   2520      but `OUTPUT_FORMAT' is not, then the last `TARGET' command is also
   2521      used to set the format for the output file.  *Note BFD::.
   2522 
   2523 
   2524 File: ld.info,  Node: REGION_ALIAS,  Next: Miscellaneous Commands,  Prev: Format Commands,  Up: Simple Commands
   2525 
   2526 3.4.4 Assign alias names to memory regions
   2527 ------------------------------------------
   2528 
   2529 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
   2530 *Note MEMORY:: command.  Each name corresponds to at most one memory
   2531 region.
   2532 
   2533      REGION_ALIAS(ALIAS, REGION)
   2534 
   2535    The `REGION_ALIAS' function creates an alias name ALIAS for the
   2536 memory region REGION.  This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
   2537 to memory regions.  An example follows.
   2538 
   2539    Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with
   2540 various memory storage devices.  All have a general purpose, volatile
   2541 memory `RAM' that allows code execution or data storage.  Some may have
   2542 a read-only, non-volatile memory `ROM' that allows code execution and
   2543 read-only data access.  The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile
   2544 memory `ROM2' with read-only data access and no code execution
   2545 capability.  We have four output sections:
   2546 
   2547    * `.text' program code;
   2548 
   2549    * `.rodata' read-only data;
   2550 
   2551    * `.data' read-write initialized data;
   2552 
   2553    * `.bss' read-write zero initialized data.
   2554 
   2555    The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system
   2556 independent part defining the output sections and a system dependent
   2557 part mapping the output sections to the memory regions available on the
   2558 system.  Our embedded systems come with three different memory setups
   2559 `A', `B' and `C':
   2560 Section            Variant A          Variant B          Variant C
   2561 .text              RAM                ROM                ROM
   2562 .rodata            RAM                ROM                ROM2
   2563 .data              RAM                RAM/ROM            RAM/ROM2
   2564 .bss               RAM                RAM                RAM
   2565    The notation `RAM/ROM' or `RAM/ROM2' means that this section is
   2566 loaded into region `ROM' or `ROM2' respectively.  Please note that the
   2567 load address of the `.data' section starts in all three variants at the
   2568 end of the `.rodata' section.
   2569 
   2570    The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows.
   2571 It includes the system dependent `linkcmds.memory' file that describes
   2572 the memory layout:
   2573      INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
   2574 
   2575      SECTIONS
   2576        {
   2577          .text :
   2578            {
   2579              *(.text)
   2580            } > REGION_TEXT
   2581          .rodata :
   2582            {
   2583              *(.rodata)
   2584              rodata_end = .;
   2585            } > REGION_RODATA
   2586          .data : AT (rodata_end)
   2587            {
   2588              data_start = .;
   2589              *(.data)
   2590            } > REGION_DATA
   2591          data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
   2592          data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
   2593          .bss :
   2594            {
   2595              *(.bss)
   2596            } > REGION_BSS
   2597        }
   2598 
   2599    Now we need three different `linkcmds.memory' files to define memory
   2600 regions and alias names.  The content of `linkcmds.memory' for the three
   2601 variants `A', `B' and `C':
   2602 `A'
   2603      Here everything goes into the `RAM'.
   2604           MEMORY
   2605             {
   2606               RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
   2607             }
   2608 
   2609           REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
   2610           REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
   2611           REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
   2612           REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
   2613 
   2614 `B'
   2615      Program code and read-only data go into the `ROM'.  Read-write
   2616      data goes into the `RAM'.  An image of the initialized data is
   2617      loaded into the `ROM' and will be copied during system start into
   2618      the `RAM'.
   2619           MEMORY
   2620             {
   2621               ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
   2622               RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
   2623             }
   2624 
   2625           REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
   2626           REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
   2627           REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
   2628           REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
   2629 
   2630 `C'
   2631      Program code goes into the `ROM'.  Read-only data goes into the
   2632      `ROM2'.  Read-write data goes into the `RAM'.  An image of the
   2633      initialized data is loaded into the `ROM2' and will be copied
   2634      during system start into the `RAM'.
   2635           MEMORY
   2636             {
   2637               ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
   2638               ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
   2639               RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
   2640             }
   2641 
   2642           REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
   2643           REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
   2644           REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
   2645           REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
   2646 
   2647    It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to
   2648 copy the `.data' section from `ROM' or `ROM2' into the `RAM' if
   2649 necessary:
   2650      #include <string.h>
   2651 
   2652      extern char data_start [];
   2653      extern char data_size [];
   2654      extern char data_load_start [];
   2655 
   2656      void copy_data(void)
   2657      {
   2658        if (data_start != data_load_start)
   2659          {
   2660            memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
   2661          }
   2662      }
   2663 
   2664 
   2665 File: ld.info,  Node: Miscellaneous Commands,  Prev: REGION_ALIAS,  Up: Simple Commands
   2666 
   2667 3.4.5 Other Linker Script Commands
   2668 ----------------------------------
   2669 
   2670 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
   2671 
   2672 `ASSERT(EXP, MESSAGE)'
   2673      Ensure that EXP is non-zero.  If it is zero, then exit the linker
   2674      with an error code, and print MESSAGE.
   2675 
   2676 `EXTERN(SYMBOL SYMBOL ...)'
   2677      Force SYMBOL to be entered in the output file as an undefined
   2678      symbol.  Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
   2679      modules from standard libraries.  You may list several SYMBOLs for
   2680      each `EXTERN', and you may use `EXTERN' multiple times.  This
   2681      command has the same effect as the `-u' command-line option.
   2682 
   2683 `FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION'
   2684      This command has the same effect as the `-d' command-line option:
   2685      to make `ld' assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
   2686      output file is specified (`-r').
   2687 
   2688 `INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION'
   2689      This command has the same effect as the `--no-define-common'
   2690      command-line option: to make `ld' omit the assignment of addresses
   2691      to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
   2692 
   2693 `INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] OUTPUT_SECTION'
   2694      This command is typically used in a script specified by `-T' to
   2695      augment the default `SECTIONS' with, for example, overlays.  It
   2696      inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
   2697      OUTPUT_SECTION, and also causes `-T' to not override the default
   2698      linker script.  The exact insertion point is as for orphan
   2699      sections.  *Note Location Counter::.  The insertion happens after
   2700      the linker has mapped input sections to output sections.  Prior to
   2701      the insertion, since `-T' scripts are parsed before the default
   2702      linker script, statements in the `-T' script occur before the
   2703      default linker script statements in the internal linker
   2704      representation of the script.  In particular, input section
   2705      assignments will be made to `-T' output sections before those in
   2706      the default script.  Here is an example of how a `-T' script using
   2707      `INSERT' might look:
   2708 
   2709           SECTIONS
   2710           {
   2711             OVERLAY :
   2712             {
   2713               .ov1 { ov1*(.text) }
   2714               .ov2 { ov2*(.text) }
   2715             }
   2716           }
   2717           INSERT AFTER .text;
   2718 
   2719 `NOCROSSREFS(SECTION SECTION ...)'
   2720      This command may be used to tell `ld' to issue an error about any
   2721      references among certain output sections.
   2722 
   2723      In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
   2724      using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another
   2725      section will not be.  Any direct references between the two
   2726      sections would be errors.  For example, it would be an error if
   2727      code in one section called a function defined in the other section.
   2728 
   2729      The `NOCROSSREFS' command takes a list of output section names.  If
   2730      `ld' detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
   2731      an error and returns a non-zero exit status.  Note that the
   2732      `NOCROSSREFS' command uses output section names, not input section
   2733      names.
   2734 
   2735 `OUTPUT_ARCH(BFDARCH)'
   2736      Specify a particular output machine architecture.  The argument is
   2737      one of the names used by the BFD library (*note BFD::).  You can
   2738      see the architecture of an object file by using the `objdump'
   2739      program with the `-f' option.
   2740 
   2741 `LD_FEATURE(STRING)'
   2742      This command may be used to modify `ld' behavior.  If STRING is
   2743      `"SANE_EXPR"' then absolute symbols and numbers in a script are
   2744      simply treated as numbers everywhere.  *Note Expression Section::.
   2745 
   2746 
   2747 File: ld.info,  Node: Assignments,  Next: SECTIONS,  Prev: Simple Commands,  Up: Scripts
   2748 
   2749 3.5 Assigning Values to Symbols
   2750 ===============================
   2751 
   2752 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script.  This will define
   2753 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
   2754 
   2755 * Menu:
   2756 
   2757 * Simple Assignments::		Simple Assignments
   2758 * PROVIDE::			PROVIDE
   2759 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN::		PROVIDE_HIDDEN
   2760 * Source Code Reference::	How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
   2761 
   2762 
   2763 File: ld.info,  Node: Simple Assignments,  Next: PROVIDE,  Up: Assignments
   2764 
   2765 3.5.1 Simple Assignments
   2766 ------------------------
   2767 
   2768 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
   2769 
   2770 `SYMBOL = EXPRESSION ;'
   2771 `SYMBOL += EXPRESSION ;'
   2772 `SYMBOL -= EXPRESSION ;'
   2773 `SYMBOL *= EXPRESSION ;'
   2774 `SYMBOL /= EXPRESSION ;'
   2775 `SYMBOL <<= EXPRESSION ;'
   2776 `SYMBOL >>= EXPRESSION ;'
   2777 `SYMBOL &= EXPRESSION ;'
   2778 `SYMBOL |= EXPRESSION ;'
   2779 
   2780    The first case will define SYMBOL to the value of EXPRESSION.  In
   2781 the other cases, SYMBOL must already be defined, and the value will be
   2782 adjusted accordingly.
   2783 
   2784    The special symbol name `.' indicates the location counter.  You may
   2785 only use this within a `SECTIONS' command.  *Note Location Counter::.
   2786 
   2787    The semicolon after EXPRESSION is required.
   2788 
   2789    Expressions are defined below; see *Note Expressions::.
   2790 
   2791    You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or
   2792 as statements within a `SECTIONS' command, or as part of an output
   2793 section description in a `SECTIONS' command.
   2794 
   2795    The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
   2796 expression; for more information, see *Note Expression Section::.
   2797 
   2798    Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
   2799 assignments may be used:
   2800 
   2801      floating_point = 0;
   2802      SECTIONS
   2803      {
   2804        .text :
   2805          {
   2806            *(.text)
   2807            _etext = .;
   2808          }
   2809        _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
   2810        .data : { *(.data) }
   2811      }
   2812    In this example, the symbol `floating_point' will be defined as
   2813 zero.  The symbol `_etext' will be defined as the address following the
   2814 last `.text' input section.  The symbol `_bdata' will be defined as the
   2815 address following the `.text' output section aligned upward to a 4 byte
   2816 boundary.
   2817 
   2818 
   2819 File: ld.info,  Node: PROVIDE,  Next: PROVIDE_HIDDEN,  Prev: Simple Assignments,  Up: Assignments
   2820 
   2821 3.5.2 PROVIDE
   2822 -------------
   2823 
   2824 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
   2825 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
   2826 the link.  For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol `etext'.
   2827 However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use `etext' as a
   2828 function name without encountering an error.  The `PROVIDE' keyword may
   2829 be used to define a symbol, such as `etext', only if it is referenced
   2830 but not defined.  The syntax is `PROVIDE(SYMBOL = EXPRESSION)'.
   2831 
   2832    Here is an example of using `PROVIDE' to define `etext':
   2833      SECTIONS
   2834      {
   2835        .text :
   2836          {
   2837            *(.text)
   2838            _etext = .;
   2839            PROVIDE(etext = .);
   2840          }
   2841      }
   2842 
   2843    In this example, if the program defines `_etext' (with a leading
   2844 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error.  If, on
   2845 the other hand, the program defines `etext' (with no leading
   2846 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
   2847 If the program references `etext' but does not define it, the linker
   2848 will use the definition in the linker script.
   2849 
   2850 
   2851 File: ld.info,  Node: PROVIDE_HIDDEN,  Next: Source Code Reference,  Prev: PROVIDE,  Up: Assignments
   2852 
   2853 3.5.3 PROVIDE_HIDDEN
   2854 --------------------
   2855 
   2856 Similar to `PROVIDE'.  For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
   2857 hidden and won't be exported.
   2858 
   2859 
   2860 File: ld.info,  Node: Source Code Reference,  Prev: PROVIDE_HIDDEN,  Up: Assignments
   2861 
   2862 3.5.4 Source Code Reference
   2863 ---------------------------
   2864 
   2865 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
   2866 intuitive.  In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to a
   2867 variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a symbol
   2868 that does not have a value.
   2869 
   2870    Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
   2871 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
   2872 stored in the symbol table.  For example, Fortran compilers commonly
   2873 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive `name
   2874 mangling'.  Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name of
   2875 a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
   2876 variable as it is defined in a linker script.  For example in C a
   2877 linker script variable might be referred to as:
   2878 
   2879        extern int foo;
   2880 
   2881    But in the linker script it might be defined as:
   2882 
   2883        _foo = 1000;
   2884 
   2885    In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
   2886 transformation has taken place.
   2887 
   2888    When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
   2889 things happen.  The first is that the compiler reserves enough space in
   2890 the program's memory to hold the _value_ of the symbol.  The second is
   2891 that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol table which
   2892 holds the symbol's _address_.  ie the symbol table contains the address
   2893 of the block of memory holding the symbol's value.  So for example the
   2894 following C declaration, at file scope:
   2895 
   2896        int foo = 1000;
   2897 
   2898    creates a entry called `foo' in the symbol table.  This entry holds
   2899 the address of an `int' sized block of memory where the number 1000 is
   2900 initially stored.
   2901 
   2902    When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
   2903 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
   2904 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
   2905 So:
   2906 
   2907        foo = 1;
   2908 
   2909    looks up the symbol `foo' in the symbol table, gets the address
   2910 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
   2911 address.  Whereas:
   2912 
   2913        int * a = & foo;
   2914 
   2915    looks up the symbol `foo' in the symbol table, gets it address and
   2916 then copies this address into the block of memory associated with the
   2917 variable `a'.
   2918 
   2919    Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
   2920 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them.  Thus they are
   2921 an address without a value.  So for example the linker script
   2922 definition:
   2923 
   2924        foo = 1000;
   2925 
   2926    creates an entry in the symbol table called `foo' which holds the
   2927 address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
   2928 address 1000.  This means that you cannot access the _value_ of a
   2929 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
   2930 access the _address_ of a linker script defined symbol.
   2931 
   2932    Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source
   2933 code you should always take the address of the symbol, and never
   2934 attempt to use its value.  For example suppose you want to copy the
   2935 contents of a section of memory called .ROM into a section called
   2936 .FLASH and the linker script contains these declarations:
   2937 
   2938        start_of_ROM   = .ROM;
   2939        end_of_ROM     = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
   2940        start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
   2941 
   2942    Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
   2943 
   2944        extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
   2945 
   2946        memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
   2947 
   2948    Note the use of the `&' operators.  These are correct.
   2949 
   2950 
   2951 File: ld.info,  Node: SECTIONS,  Next: MEMORY,  Prev: Assignments,  Up: Scripts
   2952 
   2953 3.6 SECTIONS Command
   2954 ====================
   2955 
   2956 The `SECTIONS' command tells the linker how to map input sections into
   2957 output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
   2958 
   2959    The format of the `SECTIONS' command is:
   2960      SECTIONS
   2961      {
   2962        SECTIONS-COMMAND
   2963        SECTIONS-COMMAND
   2964        ...
   2965      }
   2966 
   2967    Each SECTIONS-COMMAND may of be one of the following:
   2968 
   2969    * an `ENTRY' command (*note Entry command: Entry Point.)
   2970 
   2971    * a symbol assignment (*note Assignments::)
   2972 
   2973    * an output section description
   2974 
   2975    * an overlay description
   2976 
   2977    The `ENTRY' command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
   2978 `SECTIONS' command for convenience in using the location counter in
   2979 those commands.  This can also make the linker script easier to
   2980 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
   2981 the layout of the output file.
   2982 
   2983    Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
   2984 below.
   2985 
   2986    If you do not use a `SECTIONS' command in your linker script, the
   2987 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
   2988 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
   2989 input files.  If all input sections are present in the first file, for
   2990 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
   2991 in the first input file.  The first section will be at address zero.
   2992 
   2993 * Menu:
   2994 
   2995 * Output Section Description::	Output section description
   2996 * Output Section Name::		Output section name
   2997 * Output Section Address::	Output section address
   2998 * Input Section::		Input section description
   2999 * Output Section Data::		Output section data
   3000 * Output Section Keywords::	Output section keywords
   3001 * Output Section Discarding::	Output section discarding
   3002 * Output Section Attributes::	Output section attributes
   3003 * Overlay Description::		Overlay description
   3004 
   3005 
   3006 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Description,  Next: Output Section Name,  Up: SECTIONS
   3007 
   3008 3.6.1 Output Section Description
   3009 --------------------------------
   3010 
   3011 The full description of an output section looks like this:
   3012      SECTION [ADDRESS] [(TYPE)] :
   3013        [AT(LMA)]
   3014        [ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN)]
   3015        [SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN)]
   3016        [CONSTRAINT]
   3017        {
   3018          OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   3019          OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   3020          ...
   3021        } [>REGION] [AT>LMA_REGION] [:PHDR :PHDR ...] [=FILLEXP]
   3022 
   3023    Most output sections do not use most of the optional section
   3024 attributes.
   3025 
   3026    The whitespace around SECTION is required, so that the section name
   3027 is unambiguous.  The colon and the curly braces are also required.  The
   3028 line breaks and other white space are optional.
   3029 
   3030    Each OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND may be one of the following:
   3031 
   3032    * a symbol assignment (*note Assignments::)
   3033 
   3034    * an input section description (*note Input Section::)
   3035 
   3036    * data values to include directly (*note Output Section Data::)
   3037 
   3038    * a special output section keyword (*note Output Section Keywords::)
   3039 
   3040 
   3041 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Name,  Next: Output Section Address,  Prev: Output Section Description,  Up: SECTIONS
   3042 
   3043 3.6.2 Output Section Name
   3044 -------------------------
   3045 
   3046 The name of the output section is SECTION.  SECTION must meet the
   3047 constraints of your output format.  In formats which only support a
   3048 limited number of sections, such as `a.out', the name must be one of
   3049 the names supported by the format (`a.out', for example, allows only
   3050 `.text', `.data' or `.bss'). If the output format supports any number
   3051 of sections, but with numbers and not names (as is the case for Oasys),
   3052 the name should be supplied as a quoted numeric string.  A section name
   3053 may consist of any sequence of characters, but a name which contains
   3054 any unusual characters such as commas must be quoted.
   3055 
   3056    The output section name `/DISCARD/' is special; *Note Output Section
   3057 Discarding::.
   3058 
   3059 
   3060 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Address,  Next: Input Section,  Prev: Output Section Name,  Up: SECTIONS
   3061 
   3062 3.6.3 Output Section Address
   3063 ----------------------------
   3064 
   3065 The ADDRESS is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory address)
   3066 of the output section.  This address is optional, but if it is provided
   3067 then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
   3068 
   3069    If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for
   3070 the section, based on the heuristic below.  This address will be
   3071 adjusted to fit the alignment requirement of the output section.  The
   3072 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
   3073 contained within the output section.
   3074 
   3075    The output section address heuristic is as follows:
   3076 
   3077    * If an output memory REGION is set for the section then it is added
   3078      to this region and its address will be the next free address in
   3079      that region.
   3080 
   3081    * If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
   3082      regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with
   3083      the section is selected to contain it.  The section's output
   3084      address will be the next free address in that region; *Note
   3085      MEMORY::.
   3086 
   3087    * If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
   3088      the output address will be based on the current value of the
   3089      location counter.
   3090 
   3091 For example:
   3092 
   3093      .text . : { *(.text) }
   3094 
   3095 and
   3096 
   3097      .text : { *(.text) }
   3098 
   3099 are subtly different.  The first will set the address of the `.text'
   3100 output section to the current value of the location counter.  The
   3101 second will set it to the current value of the location counter aligned
   3102 to the strictest alignment of any of the `.text' input sections.
   3103 
   3104    The ADDRESS may be an arbitrary expression; *Note Expressions::.
   3105 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
   3106 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
   3107 do something like this:
   3108      .text ALIGN(0x10) : { *(.text) }
   3109    This works because `ALIGN' returns the current location counter
   3110 aligned upward to the specified value.
   3111 
   3112    Specifying ADDRESS for a section will change the value of the
   3113 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty.  (Empty
   3114 sections are ignored).
   3115 
   3116 
   3117 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section,  Next: Output Section Data,  Prev: Output Section Address,  Up: SECTIONS
   3118 
   3119 3.6.4 Input Section Description
   3120 -------------------------------
   3121 
   3122 The most common output section command is an input section description.
   3123 
   3124    The input section description is the most basic linker script
   3125 operation.  You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out
   3126 your program in memory.  You use input section descriptions to tell the
   3127 linker how to map the input files into your memory layout.
   3128 
   3129 * Menu:
   3130 
   3131 * Input Section Basics::	Input section basics
   3132 * Input Section Wildcards::	Input section wildcard patterns
   3133 * Input Section Common::	Input section for common symbols
   3134 * Input Section Keep::		Input section and garbage collection
   3135 * Input Section Example::	Input section example
   3136 
   3137 
   3138 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Basics,  Next: Input Section Wildcards,  Up: Input Section
   3139 
   3140 3.6.4.1 Input Section Basics
   3141 ............................
   3142 
   3143 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
   3144 by a list of section names in parentheses.
   3145 
   3146    The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
   3147 describe further below (*note Input Section Wildcards::).
   3148 
   3149    The most common input section description is to include all input
   3150 sections with a particular name in the output section.  For example, to
   3151 include all input `.text' sections, you would write:
   3152      *(.text)
   3153    Here the `*' is a wildcard which matches any file name.  To exclude
   3154 a list of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may
   3155 be used to match all files except the ones specified in the
   3156 EXCLUDE_FILE list.  For example:
   3157      *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
   3158    will cause all .ctors sections from all files except `crtend.o' and
   3159 `otherfile.o' to be included.
   3160 
   3161    There are two ways to include more than one section:
   3162      *(.text .rdata)
   3163      *(.text) *(.rdata)
   3164    The difference between these is the order in which the `.text' and
   3165 `.rdata' input sections will appear in the output section.  In the
   3166 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
   3167 they are found in the linker input.  In the second example, all `.text'
   3168 input sections will appear first, followed by all `.rdata' input
   3169 sections.
   3170 
   3171    You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular
   3172 file.  You would do this if one or more of your files contain special
   3173 data that needs to be at a particular location in memory.  For example:
   3174      data.o(.data)
   3175 
   3176    To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
   3177 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
   3178 
   3179    Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF
   3180 sections:
   3181 
   3182      SECTIONS {
   3183        .text : { INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) }
   3184        .text2 :  { INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) }
   3185      }
   3186 
   3187    In this example, the output section `.text' will be comprised of any
   3188 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
   3189 `SHF_MERGE' and `SHF_STRINGS' are set.  The output section `.text2'
   3190 will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text) whose
   3191 section header flag `SHF_WRITE' is clear.
   3192 
   3193    You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
   3194 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file, with
   3195 no whitespace around the colon.
   3196 
   3197 `archive:file'
   3198      matches file within archive
   3199 
   3200 `archive:'
   3201      matches the whole archive
   3202 
   3203 `:file'
   3204      matches file but not one in an archive
   3205 
   3206    Either one or both of `archive' and `file' can contain shell
   3207 wildcards.  On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
   3208 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so `c:myfile.o'
   3209 is a simple file specification, not `myfile.o' within an archive called
   3210 `c'.  `archive:file' filespecs may also be used within an
   3211 `EXCLUDE_FILE' list, but may not appear in other linker script
   3212 contexts.  For instance, you cannot extract a file from an archive by
   3213 using `archive:file' in an `INPUT' command.
   3214 
   3215    If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections
   3216 in the input file will be included in the output section.  This is not
   3217 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion.  For example:
   3218      data.o
   3219 
   3220    When you use a file name which is not an `archive:file' specifier
   3221 and does not contain any wild card characters, the linker will first
   3222 see if you also specified the file name on the linker command line or
   3223 in an `INPUT' command.  If you did not, the linker will attempt to open
   3224 the file as an input file, as though it appeared on the command line.
   3225 Note that this differs from an `INPUT' command, because the linker will
   3226 not search for the file in the archive search path.
   3227 
   3228 
   3229 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Wildcards,  Next: Input Section Common,  Prev: Input Section Basics,  Up: Input Section
   3230 
   3231 3.6.4.2 Input Section Wildcard Patterns
   3232 .......................................
   3233 
   3234 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
   3235 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
   3236 
   3237    The file name of `*' seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
   3238 pattern for the file name.
   3239 
   3240    The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
   3241 
   3242 `*'
   3243      matches any number of characters
   3244 
   3245 `?'
   3246      matches any single character
   3247 
   3248 `[CHARS]'
   3249      matches a single instance of any of the CHARS; the `-' character
   3250      may be used to specify a range of characters, as in `[a-z]' to
   3251      match any lower case letter
   3252 
   3253 `\'
   3254      quotes the following character
   3255 
   3256    When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
   3257 will not match a `/' character (used to separate directory names on
   3258 Unix).  A pattern consisting of a single `*' character is an exception;
   3259 it will always match any file name, whether it contains a `/' or not.
   3260 In a section name, the wildcard characters will match a `/' character.
   3261 
   3262    File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
   3263 specified on the command line or in an `INPUT' command.  The linker
   3264 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
   3265 
   3266    If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file
   3267 name appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the
   3268 linker will use the first match in the linker script.  For example, this
   3269 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
   3270 `data.o' rule will not be used:
   3271      .data : { *(.data) }
   3272      .data1 : { data.o(.data) }
   3273 
   3274    Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by
   3275 wildcards in the order in which they are seen during the link.  You can
   3276 change this by using the `SORT_BY_NAME' keyword, which appears before a
   3277 wildcard pattern in parentheses (e.g., `SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)').  When
   3278 the `SORT_BY_NAME' keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or
   3279 sections into ascending order by name before placing them in the output
   3280 file.
   3281 
   3282    `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' is very similar to `SORT_BY_NAME'. The
   3283 difference is `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' will sort sections into ascending
   3284 order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
   3285 
   3286    `SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY' is very similar to `SORT_BY_NAME'. The
   3287 difference is `SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY' will sort sections into ascending
   3288 order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute encoded in
   3289 the section name before placing them in the output file.
   3290 
   3291    `SORT' is an alias for `SORT_BY_NAME'.
   3292 
   3293    When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script,
   3294 there can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
   3295 
   3296   1. `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section pattern)).
   3297      It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment
   3298      if 2 sections have the same name.
   3299 
   3300   2. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)).
   3301      It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name
   3302      if 2 sections have the same alignment.
   3303 
   3304   3. `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)) is
   3305      treated the same as `SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern).
   3306 
   3307   4. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section
   3308      pattern)) is treated the same as `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard
   3309      section pattern).
   3310 
   3311   5. All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
   3312 
   3313    When both command line section sorting option and linker script
   3314 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always takes
   3315 precedence over the command line option.
   3316 
   3317    If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
   3318 command line option will make the section sorting command to be treated
   3319 as nested sorting command.
   3320 
   3321   1. `SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern ) with `--sort-sections
   3322      alignment' is equivalent to `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT'
   3323      (wildcard section pattern)).
   3324 
   3325   2. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section pattern) with
   3326      `--sort-section name' is equivalent to `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT'
   3327      (`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)).
   3328 
   3329    If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
   3330 command line option will be ignored.
   3331 
   3332    If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use
   3333 the `-M' linker option to generate a map file.  The map file shows
   3334 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
   3335 
   3336    This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
   3337 files.  This linker script directs the linker to place all `.text'
   3338 sections in `.text' and all `.bss' sections in `.bss'.  The linker will
   3339 place the `.data' section from all files beginning with an upper case
   3340 character in `.DATA'; for all other files, the linker will place the
   3341 `.data' section in `.data'.
   3342      SECTIONS {
   3343        .text : { *(.text) }
   3344        .DATA : { [A-Z]*(.data) }
   3345        .data : { *(.data) }
   3346        .bss : { *(.bss) }
   3347      }
   3348 
   3349 
   3350 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Common,  Next: Input Section Keep,  Prev: Input Section Wildcards,  Up: Input Section
   3351 
   3352 3.6.4.3 Input Section for Common Symbols
   3353 ........................................
   3354 
   3355 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
   3356 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section.  The
   3357 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
   3358 named `COMMON'.
   3359 
   3360    You may use file names with the `COMMON' section just as with any
   3361 other input sections.  You can use this to place common symbols from a
   3362 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
   3363 input files are placed in another section.
   3364 
   3365    In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
   3366 `.bss' section in the output file.  For example:
   3367      .bss { *(.bss) *(COMMON) }
   3368 
   3369    Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol.
   3370 For example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard
   3371 common symbols and small common symbols.  In this case, the linker will
   3372 use a different special section name for other types of common symbols.
   3373 In the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses `COMMON' for standard common
   3374 symbols and `.scommon' for small common symbols.  This permits you to
   3375 map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
   3376 locations.
   3377 
   3378    You will sometimes see `[COMMON]' in old linker scripts.  This
   3379 notation is now considered obsolete.  It is equivalent to `*(COMMON)'.
   3380 
   3381 
   3382 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Keep,  Next: Input Section Example,  Prev: Input Section Common,  Up: Input Section
   3383 
   3384 3.6.4.4 Input Section and Garbage Collection
   3385 ............................................
   3386 
   3387 When link-time garbage collection is in use (`--gc-sections'), it is
   3388 often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.  This is
   3389 accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry with
   3390 `KEEP()', as in `KEEP(*(.init))' or `KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))'.
   3391 
   3392 
   3393 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Example,  Prev: Input Section Keep,  Up: Input Section
   3394 
   3395 3.6.4.5 Input Section Example
   3396 .............................
   3397 
   3398 The following example is a complete linker script.  It tells the linker
   3399 to read all of the sections from file `all.o' and place them at the
   3400 start of output section `outputa' which starts at location `0x10000'.
   3401 All of section `.input1' from file `foo.o' follows immediately, in the
   3402 same output section.  All of section `.input2' from `foo.o' goes into
   3403 output section `outputb', followed by section `.input1' from `foo1.o'.
   3404 All of the remaining `.input1' and `.input2' sections from any files
   3405 are written to output section `outputc'.
   3406 
   3407      SECTIONS {
   3408        outputa 0x10000 :
   3409          {
   3410          all.o
   3411          foo.o (.input1)
   3412          }
   3413        outputb :
   3414          {
   3415          foo.o (.input2)
   3416          foo1.o (.input1)
   3417          }
   3418        outputc :
   3419          {
   3420          *(.input1)
   3421          *(.input2)
   3422          }
   3423      }
   3424 
   3425 
   3426 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Data,  Next: Output Section Keywords,  Prev: Input Section,  Up: SECTIONS
   3427 
   3428 3.6.5 Output Section Data
   3429 -------------------------
   3430 
   3431 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
   3432 `BYTE', `SHORT', `LONG', `QUAD', or `SQUAD' as an output section
   3433 command.  Each keyword is followed by an expression in parentheses
   3434 providing the value to store (*note Expressions::).  The value of the
   3435 expression is stored at the current value of the location counter.
   3436 
   3437    The `BYTE', `SHORT', `LONG', and `QUAD' commands store one, two,
   3438 four, and eight bytes (respectively).  After storing the bytes, the
   3439 location counter is incremented by the number of bytes stored.
   3440 
   3441    For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte
   3442 value of the symbol `addr':
   3443      BYTE(1)
   3444      LONG(addr)
   3445 
   3446    When using a 64 bit host or target, `QUAD' and `SQUAD' are the same;
   3447 they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value.  When both host and target
   3448 are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits.  In this case `QUAD'
   3449 stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and `SQUAD' stores a 32
   3450 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
   3451 
   3452    If the object file format of the output file has an explicit
   3453 endianness, which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that
   3454 endianness.  When the object file format does not have an explicit
   3455 endianness, as is true of, for example, S-records, the value will be
   3456 stored in the endianness of the first input object file.
   3457 
   3458    Note--these commands only work inside a section description and not
   3459 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
   3460      SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } LONG(1) .data : { *(.data) } }
   3461    whereas this will work:
   3462      SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) ; LONG(1) } .data : { *(.data) } }
   3463 
   3464    You may use the `FILL' command to set the fill pattern for the
   3465 current section.  It is followed by an expression in parentheses.  Any
   3466 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
   3467 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
   3468 with the value of the expression, repeated as necessary.  A `FILL'
   3469 statement covers memory locations after the point at which it occurs in
   3470 the section definition; by including more than one `FILL' statement,
   3471 you can have different fill patterns in different parts of an output
   3472 section.
   3473 
   3474    This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
   3475 value `0x90':
   3476      FILL(0x90909090)
   3477 
   3478    The `FILL' command is similar to the `=FILLEXP' output section
   3479 attribute, but it only affects the part of the section following the
   3480 `FILL' command, rather than the entire section.  If both are used, the
   3481 `FILL' command takes precedence.  *Note Output Section Fill::, for
   3482 details on the fill expression.
   3483 
   3484 
   3485 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Keywords,  Next: Output Section Discarding,  Prev: Output Section Data,  Up: SECTIONS
   3486 
   3487 3.6.6 Output Section Keywords
   3488 -----------------------------
   3489 
   3490 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
   3491 commands.
   3492 
   3493 `CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS'
   3494      The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input
   3495      file.  The name of each symbol will be the name of the
   3496      corresponding input file.  The section of each symbol will be the
   3497      output section in which the `CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS' command
   3498      appears.
   3499 
   3500      This is conventional for the a.out object file format.  It is not
   3501      normally used for any other object file format.
   3502 
   3503 `CONSTRUCTORS'
   3504      When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
   3505      unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
   3506      destructors.  When linking object file formats which do not support
   3507      arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
   3508      automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by
   3509      name.  For these object file formats, the `CONSTRUCTORS' command
   3510      tells the linker to place constructor information in the output
   3511      section where the `CONSTRUCTORS' command appears.  The
   3512      `CONSTRUCTORS' command is ignored for other object file formats.
   3513 
   3514      The symbol `__CTOR_LIST__' marks the start of the global
   3515      constructors, and the symbol `__CTOR_END__' marks the end.
   3516      Similarly, `__DTOR_LIST__' and `__DTOR_END__' mark the start and
   3517      end of the global destructors.  The first word in the list is the
   3518      number of entries, followed by the address of each constructor or
   3519      destructor, followed by a zero word.  The compiler must arrange to
   3520      actually run the code.  For these object file formats GNU C++
   3521      normally calls constructors from a subroutine `__main'; a call to
   3522      `__main' is automatically inserted into the startup code for
   3523      `main'.  GNU C++ normally runs destructors either by using
   3524      `atexit', or directly from the function `exit'.
   3525 
   3526      For object file formats such as `COFF' or `ELF' which support
   3527      arbitrary section names, GNU C++ will normally arrange to put the
   3528      addresses of global constructors and destructors into the `.ctors'
   3529      and `.dtors' sections.  Placing the following sequence into your
   3530      linker script will build the sort of table which the GNU C++
   3531      runtime code expects to see.
   3532 
   3533                 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
   3534                 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
   3535                 *(.ctors)
   3536                 LONG(0)
   3537                 __CTOR_END__ = .;
   3538                 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
   3539                 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
   3540                 *(.dtors)
   3541                 LONG(0)
   3542                 __DTOR_END__ = .;
   3543 
   3544      If you are using the GNU C++ support for initialization priority,
   3545      which provides some control over the order in which global
   3546      constructors are run, you must sort the constructors at link time
   3547      to ensure that they are executed in the correct order.  When using
   3548      the `CONSTRUCTORS' command, use `SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)'
   3549      instead.  When using the `.ctors' and `.dtors' sections, use
   3550      `*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))' and `*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))' instead of
   3551      just `*(.ctors)' and `*(.dtors)'.
   3552 
   3553      Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues
   3554      automatically, and you will not need to concern yourself with
   3555      them.  However, you may need to consider this if you are using C++
   3556      and writing your own linker scripts.
   3557 
   3558 
   3559 
   3560 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Discarding,  Next: Output Section Attributes,  Prev: Output Section Keywords,  Up: SECTIONS
   3561 
   3562 3.6.7 Output Section Discarding
   3563 -------------------------------
   3564 
   3565 The linker will not create output sections with no contents.  This is
   3566 for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not be
   3567 present in any of the input files.  For example:
   3568      .foo : { *(.foo) }
   3569    will only create a `.foo' section in the output file if there is a
   3570 `.foo' section in at least one input file, and if the input sections
   3571 are not all empty.  Other link script directives that allocate space in
   3572 an output section will also create the output section.
   3573 
   3574    The linker will ignore address assignments (*note Output Section
   3575 Address::) on discarded output sections, except when the linker script
   3576 defines symbols in the output section.  In that case the linker will
   3577 obey the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
   3578 section is discarded.
   3579 
   3580    The special output section name `/DISCARD/' may be used to discard
   3581 input sections.  Any input sections which are assigned to an output
   3582 section named `/DISCARD/' are not included in the output file.
   3583 
   3584 
   3585 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Attributes,  Next: Overlay Description,  Prev: Output Section Discarding,  Up: SECTIONS
   3586 
   3587 3.6.8 Output Section Attributes
   3588 -------------------------------
   3589 
   3590 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
   3591 like this:
   3592 
   3593      SECTION [ADDRESS] [(TYPE)] :
   3594        [AT(LMA)]
   3595        [ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN)]
   3596        [SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN)]
   3597        [CONSTRAINT]
   3598        {
   3599          OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   3600          OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   3601          ...
   3602        } [>REGION] [AT>LMA_REGION] [:PHDR :PHDR ...] [=FILLEXP]
   3603 
   3604    We've already described SECTION, ADDRESS, and
   3605 OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND.  In this section we will describe the remaining
   3606 section attributes.
   3607 
   3608 * Menu:
   3609 
   3610 * Output Section Type::		Output section type
   3611 * Output Section LMA::		Output section LMA
   3612 * Forced Output Alignment::	Forced Output Alignment
   3613 * Forced Input Alignment::	Forced Input Alignment
   3614 * Output Section Constraint::   Output section constraint
   3615 * Output Section Region::	Output section region
   3616 * Output Section Phdr::		Output section phdr
   3617 * Output Section Fill::		Output section fill
   3618 
   3619 
   3620 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Type,  Next: Output Section LMA,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3621 
   3622 3.6.8.1 Output Section Type
   3623 ...........................
   3624 
   3625 Each output section may have a type.  The type is a keyword in
   3626 parentheses.  The following types are defined:
   3627 
   3628 `NOLOAD'
   3629      The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not
   3630      be loaded into memory when the program is run.
   3631 
   3632 `DSECT'
   3633 `COPY'
   3634 `INFO'
   3635 `OVERLAY'
   3636      These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
   3637      rarely used.  They all have the same effect: the section should be
   3638      marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
   3639      section when the program is run.
   3640 
   3641    The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
   3642 the input sections which map into it.  You can override this by using
   3643 the section type.  For example, in the script sample below, the `ROM'
   3644 section is addressed at memory location `0' and does not need to be
   3645 loaded when the program is run.
   3646      SECTIONS {
   3647        ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : { ... }
   3648        ...
   3649      }
   3650 
   3651 
   3652 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section LMA,  Next: Forced Output Alignment,  Prev: Output Section Type,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3653 
   3654 3.6.8.2 Output Section LMA
   3655 ..........................
   3656 
   3657 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
   3658 *Note Basic Script Concepts::.  The virtual address is specified by the
   3659 *note Output Section Address:: described earlier.  The load address is
   3660 specified by the `AT' or `AT>' keywords.  Specifying a load address is
   3661 optional.
   3662 
   3663    The `AT' keyword takes an expression as an argument.  This specifies
   3664 the exact load address of the section.  The `AT>' keyword takes the
   3665 name of a memory region as an argument.  *Note MEMORY::.  The load
   3666 address of the section is set to the next free address in the region,
   3667 aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
   3668 
   3669    If neither `AT' nor `AT>' is specified for an allocatable section,
   3670 the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the load
   3671 address:
   3672 
   3673    * If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
   3674      the LMA address as well.
   3675 
   3676    * If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
   3677 
   3678    * Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible with
   3679      the current section, and this region contains at least one
   3680      section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the VMA and
   3681      LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of the
   3682      last section in the located region.
   3683 
   3684    * If no memory regions have been declared then a default region that
   3685      covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
   3686 
   3687    * If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
   3688      section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
   3689 
   3690    This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image.  For
   3691 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
   3692 called `.text', which starts at `0x1000', one called `.mdata', which is
   3693 loaded at the end of the `.text' section even though its VMA is
   3694 `0x2000', and one called `.bss' to hold uninitialized data at address
   3695 `0x3000'.  The symbol `_data' is defined with the value `0x2000', which
   3696 shows that the location counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
   3697 
   3698      SECTIONS
   3699        {
   3700        .text 0x1000 : { *(.text) _etext = . ; }
   3701        .mdata 0x2000 :
   3702          AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
   3703          { _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ;  }
   3704        .bss 0x3000 :
   3705          { _bstart = . ;  *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;}
   3706      }
   3707 
   3708    The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated
   3709 with this linker script would include something like the following, to
   3710 copy the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address.
   3711 Notice how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the
   3712 linker script.
   3713 
   3714      extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
   3715      char *src = &_etext;
   3716      char *dst = &_data;
   3717 
   3718      /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it.  */
   3719      while (dst < &_edata)
   3720        *dst++ = *src++;
   3721 
   3722      /* Zero bss.  */
   3723      for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
   3724        *dst = 0;
   3725 
   3726 
   3727 File: ld.info,  Node: Forced Output Alignment,  Next: Forced Input Alignment,  Prev: Output Section LMA,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3728 
   3729 3.6.8.3 Forced Output Alignment
   3730 ...............................
   3731 
   3732 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
   3733 
   3734 
   3735 File: ld.info,  Node: Forced Input Alignment,  Next: Output Section Constraint,  Prev: Forced Output Alignment,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3736 
   3737 3.6.8.4 Forced Input Alignment
   3738 ..............................
   3739 
   3740 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
   3741 SUBALIGN.  The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
   3742 sections, whether larger or smaller.
   3743 
   3744 
   3745 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Constraint,  Next: Output Section Region,  Prev: Forced Input Alignment,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3746 
   3747 3.6.8.5 Output Section Constraint
   3748 .................................
   3749 
   3750 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all of
   3751 its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
   3752 read-write by using the keyword `ONLY_IF_RO' and `ONLY_IF_RW'
   3753 respectively.
   3754 
   3755 
   3756 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Region,  Next: Output Section Phdr,  Prev: Output Section Constraint,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3757 
   3758 3.6.8.6 Output Section Region
   3759 .............................
   3760 
   3761 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
   3762 using `>REGION'.  *Note MEMORY::.
   3763 
   3764    Here is a simple example:
   3765      MEMORY { rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 }
   3766      SECTIONS { ROM : { *(.text) } >rom }
   3767 
   3768 
   3769 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Phdr,  Next: Output Section Fill,  Prev: Output Section Region,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3770 
   3771 3.6.8.7 Output Section Phdr
   3772 ...........................
   3773 
   3774 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
   3775 using `:PHDR'.  *Note PHDRS::.  If a section is assigned to one or more
   3776 segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be assigned to
   3777 those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly `:PHDR' modifier.
   3778 You can use `:NONE' to tell the linker to not put the section in any
   3779 segment at all.
   3780 
   3781    Here is a simple example:
   3782      PHDRS { text PT_LOAD ; }
   3783      SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } :text }
   3784 
   3785 
   3786 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Fill,  Prev: Output Section Phdr,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3787 
   3788 3.6.8.8 Output Section Fill
   3789 ...........................
   3790 
   3791 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using `=FILLEXP'.
   3792 FILLEXP is an expression (*note Expressions::).  Any otherwise
   3793 unspecified regions of memory within the output section (for example,
   3794 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) will be
   3795 filled with the value, repeated as necessary.  If the fill expression
   3796 is a simple hex number, ie. a string of hex digit starting with `0x'
   3797 and without a trailing `k' or `M', then an arbitrarily long sequence of
   3798 hex digits can be used to specify the fill pattern;  Leading zeros
   3799 become part of the pattern too.  For all other cases, including extra
   3800 parentheses or a unary `+', the fill pattern is the four least
   3801 significant bytes of the value of the expression.  In all cases, the
   3802 number is big-endian.
   3803 
   3804    You can also change the fill value with a `FILL' command in the
   3805 output section commands; (*note Output Section Data::).
   3806 
   3807    Here is a simple example:
   3808      SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } =0x90909090 }
   3809 
   3810 
   3811 File: ld.info,  Node: Overlay Description,  Prev: Output Section Attributes,  Up: SECTIONS
   3812 
   3813 3.6.9 Overlay Description
   3814 -------------------------
   3815 
   3816 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
   3817 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
   3818 the same memory address.  At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
   3819 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
   3820 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits.  This approach
   3821 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
   3822 than another.
   3823 
   3824    Overlays are described using the `OVERLAY' command.  The `OVERLAY'
   3825 command is used within a `SECTIONS' command, like an output section
   3826 description.  The full syntax of the `OVERLAY' command is as follows:
   3827      OVERLAY [START] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( LDADDR )]
   3828        {
   3829          SECNAME1
   3830            {
   3831              OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   3832              OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   3833              ...
   3834            } [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
   3835          SECNAME2
   3836            {
   3837              OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   3838              OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   3839              ...
   3840            } [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
   3841          ...
   3842        } [>REGION] [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
   3843 
   3844    Everything is optional except `OVERLAY' (a keyword), and each
   3845 section must have a name (SECNAME1 and SECNAME2 above).  The section
   3846 definitions within the `OVERLAY' construct are identical to those
   3847 within the general `SECTIONS' contruct (*note SECTIONS::), except that
   3848 no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for sections within
   3849 an `OVERLAY'.
   3850 
   3851    The sections are all defined with the same starting address.  The
   3852 load addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are
   3853 consecutive in memory starting at the load address used for the
   3854 `OVERLAY' as a whole (as with normal section definitions, the load
   3855 address is optional, and defaults to the start address; the start
   3856 address is also optional, and defaults to the current value of the
   3857 location counter).
   3858 
   3859    If the `NOCROSSREFS' keyword is used, and there any references among
   3860 the sections, the linker will report an error.  Since the sections all
   3861 run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
   3862 section to refer directly to another.  *Note NOCROSSREFS: Miscellaneous
   3863 Commands.
   3864 
   3865    For each section within the `OVERLAY', the linker automatically
   3866 provides two symbols.  The symbol `__load_start_SECNAME' is defined as
   3867 the starting load address of the section.  The symbol
   3868 `__load_stop_SECNAME' is defined as the final load address of the
   3869 section.  Any characters within SECNAME which are not legal within C
   3870 identifiers are removed.  C (or assembler) code may use these symbols
   3871 to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
   3872 
   3873    At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set
   3874 to the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest
   3875 section.
   3876 
   3877    Here is an example.  Remember that this would appear inside a
   3878 `SECTIONS' construct.
   3879        OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
   3880         {
   3881           .text0 { o1/*.o(.text) }
   3882           .text1 { o2/*.o(.text) }
   3883         }
   3884 This will define both `.text0' and `.text1' to start at address
   3885 0x1000.  `.text0' will be loaded at address 0x4000, and `.text1' will
   3886 be loaded immediately after `.text0'.  The following symbols will be
   3887 defined if referenced: `__load_start_text0', `__load_stop_text0',
   3888 `__load_start_text1', `__load_stop_text1'.
   3889 
   3890    C code to copy overlay `.text1' into the overlay area might look
   3891 like the following.
   3892 
   3893        extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
   3894        memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
   3895                &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
   3896 
   3897    Note that the `OVERLAY' command is just syntactic sugar, since
   3898 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands.  The above
   3899 example could have been written identically as follows.
   3900 
   3901        .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) { o1/*.o(.text) }
   3902        PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
   3903        PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
   3904        .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) { o2/*.o(.text) }
   3905        PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
   3906        PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
   3907        . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
   3908 
   3909 
   3910 File: ld.info,  Node: MEMORY,  Next: PHDRS,  Prev: SECTIONS,  Up: Scripts
   3911 
   3912 3.7 MEMORY Command
   3913 ==================
   3914 
   3915 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
   3916 memory.  You can override this by using the `MEMORY' command.
   3917 
   3918    The `MEMORY' command describes the location and size of blocks of
   3919 memory in the target.  You can use it to describe which memory regions
   3920 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid.  You
   3921 can then assign sections to particular memory regions.  The linker will
   3922 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
   3923 regions that become too full.  The linker will not shuffle sections
   3924 around to fit into the available regions.
   3925 
   3926    A linker script may contain at most one use of the `MEMORY' command.
   3927 However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as you
   3928 wish.  The syntax is:
   3929      MEMORY
   3930        {
   3931          NAME [(ATTR)] : ORIGIN = ORIGIN, LENGTH = LEN
   3932          ...
   3933        }
   3934 
   3935    The NAME is a name used in the linker script to refer to the region.
   3936 The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.  Region
   3937 names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict with
   3938 symbol names, file names, or section names.  Each memory region must
   3939 have a distinct name within the `MEMORY' command.  However you can add
   3940 later alias names to existing memory regions with the *Note
   3941 REGION_ALIAS:: command.
   3942 
   3943    The ATTR string is an optional list of attributes that specify
   3944 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
   3945 not explicitly mapped in the linker script.  As described in *Note
   3946 SECTIONS::, if you do not specify an output section for some input
   3947 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
   3948 the input section.  If you define region attributes, the linker will use
   3949 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
   3950 
   3951    The ATTR string must consist only of the following characters:
   3952 `R'
   3953      Read-only section
   3954 
   3955 `W'
   3956      Read/write section
   3957 
   3958 `X'
   3959      Executable section
   3960 
   3961 `A'
   3962      Allocatable section
   3963 
   3964 `I'
   3965      Initialized section
   3966 
   3967 `L'
   3968      Same as `I'
   3969 
   3970 `!'
   3971      Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
   3972 
   3973    If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
   3974 `!', it will be placed in the memory region.  The `!' attribute
   3975 reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed in the
   3976 memory region only if it does not match any of the listed attributes.
   3977 
   3978    The ORIGIN is an numerical expression for the start address of the
   3979 memory region.  The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
   3980 cannot involve any symbols.  The keyword `ORIGIN' may be abbreviated to
   3981 `org' or `o' (but not, for example, `ORG').
   3982 
   3983    The LEN is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory region.
   3984 As with the ORIGIN expression, the expression must be numerical only
   3985 and must evaluate to a constant.  The keyword `LENGTH' may be
   3986 abbreviated to `len' or `l'.
   3987 
   3988    In the following example, we specify that there are two memory
   3989 regions available for allocation: one starting at `0' for 256 kilobytes,
   3990 and the other starting at `0x40000000' for four megabytes.  The linker
   3991 will place into the `rom' memory region every section which is not
   3992 explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only or
   3993 executable.  The linker will place other sections which are not
   3994 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the `ram' memory region.
   3995 
   3996      MEMORY
   3997        {
   3998          rom (rx)  : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
   3999          ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
   4000        }
   4001 
   4002    Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
   4003 specific output sections into that memory region by using the `>REGION'
   4004 output section attribute.  For example, if you have a memory region
   4005 named `mem', you would use `>mem' in the output section definition.
   4006 *Note Output Section Region::.  If no address was specified for the
   4007 output section, the linker will set the address to the next available
   4008 address within the memory region.  If the combined output sections
   4009 directed to a memory region are too large for the region, the linker
   4010 will issue an error message.
   4011 
   4012    It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
   4013 expression via the `ORIGIN(MEMORY)' and `LENGTH(MEMORY)' functions:
   4014 
   4015        _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
   4016 
   4017 
   4018 File: ld.info,  Node: PHDRS,  Next: VERSION,  Prev: MEMORY,  Up: Scripts
   4019 
   4020 3.8 PHDRS Command
   4021 =================
   4022 
   4023 The ELF object file format uses "program headers", also knows as
   4024 "segments".  The program headers describe how the program should be
   4025 loaded into memory.  You can print them out by using the `objdump'
   4026 program with the `-p' option.
   4027 
   4028    When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
   4029 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
   4030 program.  This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
   4031 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
   4032 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
   4033 
   4034    The linker will create reasonable program headers by default.
   4035 However, in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
   4036 precisely.  You may use the `PHDRS' command for this purpose.  When the
   4037 linker sees the `PHDRS' command in the linker script, it will not
   4038 create any program headers other than the ones specified.
   4039 
   4040    The linker only pays attention to the `PHDRS' command when
   4041 generating an ELF output file.  In other cases, the linker will simply
   4042 ignore `PHDRS'.
   4043 
   4044    This is the syntax of the `PHDRS' command.  The words `PHDRS',
   4045 `FILEHDR', `AT', and `FLAGS' are keywords.
   4046 
   4047      PHDRS
   4048      {
   4049        NAME TYPE [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( ADDRESS ) ]
   4050              [ FLAGS ( FLAGS ) ] ;
   4051      }
   4052 
   4053    The NAME is used only for reference in the `SECTIONS' command of the
   4054 linker script.  It is not put into the output file.  Program header
   4055 names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict with
   4056 symbol names, file names, or section names.  Each program header must
   4057 have a distinct name.  The headers are processed in order and it is
   4058 usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
   4059 
   4060    Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
   4061 system loader will load from the file.  In the linker script, you
   4062 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
   4063 sections in the segments.  You use the `:PHDR' output section attribute
   4064 to place a section in a particular segment.  *Note Output Section
   4065 Phdr::.
   4066 
   4067    It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment.  This
   4068 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another.  You may
   4069 repeat `:PHDR', using it once for each segment which should contain the
   4070 section.
   4071 
   4072    If you place a section in one or more segments using `:PHDR', then
   4073 the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do not
   4074 specify `:PHDR' in the same segments.  This is for convenience, since
   4075 generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be placed in a single
   4076 segment.  You can use `:NONE' to override the default segment and tell
   4077 the linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
   4078 
   4079    You may use the `FILEHDR' and `PHDRS' keywords after the program
   4080 header type to further describe the contents of the segment.  The
   4081 `FILEHDR' keyword means that the segment should include the ELF file
   4082 header.  The `PHDRS' keyword means that the segment should include the
   4083 ELF program headers themselves.  If applied to a loadable segment
   4084 (`PT_LOAD'), all prior loadable segments must have one of these
   4085 keywords.
   4086 
   4087    The TYPE may be one of the following.  The numbers indicate the
   4088 value of the keyword.
   4089 
   4090 `PT_NULL' (0)
   4091      Indicates an unused program header.
   4092 
   4093 `PT_LOAD' (1)
   4094      Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be
   4095      loaded from the file.
   4096 
   4097 `PT_DYNAMIC' (2)
   4098      Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
   4099 
   4100 `PT_INTERP' (3)
   4101      Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may
   4102      be found.
   4103 
   4104 `PT_NOTE' (4)
   4105      Indicates a segment holding note information.
   4106 
   4107 `PT_SHLIB' (5)
   4108      A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the
   4109      ELF ABI.
   4110 
   4111 `PT_PHDR' (6)
   4112      Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
   4113 
   4114 EXPRESSION
   4115      An expression giving the numeric type of the program header.  This
   4116      may be used for types not defined above.
   4117 
   4118    You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular
   4119 address in memory by using an `AT' expression.  This is identical to the
   4120 `AT' command used as an output section attribute (*note Output Section
   4121 LMA::).  The `AT' command for a program header overrides the output
   4122 section attribute.
   4123 
   4124    The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
   4125 which comprise the segment.  You may use the `FLAGS' keyword to
   4126 explicitly specify the segment flags.  The value of FLAGS must be an
   4127 integer.  It is used to set the `p_flags' field of the program header.
   4128 
   4129    Here is an example of `PHDRS'.  This shows a typical set of program
   4130 headers used on a native ELF system.
   4131 
   4132      PHDRS
   4133      {
   4134        headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
   4135        interp PT_INTERP ;
   4136        text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
   4137        data PT_LOAD ;
   4138        dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
   4139      }
   4140 
   4141      SECTIONS
   4142      {
   4143        . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
   4144        .interp : { *(.interp) } :text :interp
   4145        .text : { *(.text) } :text
   4146        .rodata : { *(.rodata) } /* defaults to :text */
   4147        ...
   4148        . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
   4149        .data : { *(.data) } :data
   4150        .dynamic : { *(.dynamic) } :data :dynamic
   4151        ...
   4152      }
   4153 
   4154 
   4155 File: ld.info,  Node: VERSION,  Next: Expressions,  Prev: PHDRS,  Up: Scripts
   4156 
   4157 3.9 VERSION Command
   4158 ===================
   4159 
   4160 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF.  Symbol versions are
   4161 only useful when using shared libraries.  The dynamic linker can use
   4162 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
   4163 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
   4164 shared library.
   4165 
   4166    You can include a version script directly in the main linker script,
   4167 or you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script.  You
   4168 can also use the `--version-script' linker option.
   4169 
   4170    The syntax of the `VERSION' command is simply
   4171      VERSION { version-script-commands }
   4172 
   4173    The format of the version script commands is identical to that used
   4174 by Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5.  The version script defines a tree of
   4175 version nodes.  You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
   4176 version script.  You can specify which symbols are bound to which
   4177 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
   4178 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
   4179 library.
   4180 
   4181    The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a
   4182 few examples.
   4183 
   4184      VERS_1.1 {
   4185      	 global:
   4186      		 foo1;
   4187      	 local:
   4188      		 old*;
   4189      		 original*;
   4190      		 new*;
   4191      };
   4192 
   4193      VERS_1.2 {
   4194      		 foo2;
   4195      } VERS_1.1;
   4196 
   4197      VERS_2.0 {
   4198      		 bar1; bar2;
   4199      	 extern "C++" {
   4200      		 ns::*;
   4201      		 "f(int, double)";
   4202      	 };
   4203      } VERS_1.2;
   4204 
   4205    This example version script defines three version nodes.  The first
   4206 version node defined is `VERS_1.1'; it has no other dependencies.  The
   4207 script binds the symbol `foo1' to `VERS_1.1'.  It reduces a number of
   4208 symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside of the
   4209 shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
   4210 symbol whose name begins with `old', `original', or `new' is matched.
   4211 The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used in the shell
   4212 when matching filenames (also known as "globbing").  However, if you
   4213 specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the name is treated
   4214 as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
   4215 
   4216    Next, the version script defines node `VERS_1.2'.  This node depends
   4217 upon `VERS_1.1'.  The script binds the symbol `foo2' to the version
   4218 node `VERS_1.2'.
   4219 
   4220    Finally, the version script defines node `VERS_2.0'.  This node
   4221 depends upon `VERS_1.2'.  The scripts binds the symbols `bar1' and
   4222 `bar2' are bound to the version node `VERS_2.0'.
   4223 
   4224    When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
   4225 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
   4226 unspecified base version of the library.  You can bind all otherwise
   4227 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using `global: *;'
   4228 somewhere in the version script.  Note that it's slightly crazy to use
   4229 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node.  Global
   4230 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
   4231 set exported for an old version.  That's wrong since older versions
   4232 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
   4233 
   4234    The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than
   4235 what they might suggest to the person reading them.  The `2.0' version
   4236 could just as well have appeared in between `1.1' and `1.2'.  However,
   4237 this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
   4238 
   4239    Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node in
   4240 the version script.  Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
   4241 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and
   4242 which won't.
   4243 
   4244      { global: foo; bar; local: *; };
   4245 
   4246    When you link an application against a shared library that has
   4247 versioned symbols, the application itself knows which version of each
   4248 symbol it requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from
   4249 each shared library it is linked against.  Thus at runtime, the dynamic
   4250 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
   4251 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
   4252 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols.  In this
   4253 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
   4254 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
   4255 search for each symbol reference.
   4256 
   4257    The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
   4258 doing minor version checking that SunOS does.  The fundamental problem
   4259 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
   4260 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
   4261 the application starts up.  If a shared library is out of date, a
   4262 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
   4263 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail.  With symbol
   4264 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
   4265 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
   4266 
   4267    There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach.  The
   4268 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
   4269 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
   4270 script.  This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
   4271 maintainer.  You can do this by putting something like:
   4272      __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo (a] VERS_1.1");
   4273    in the C source file.  This renames the function `original_foo' to
   4274 be an alias for `foo' bound to the version node `VERS_1.1'.  The
   4275 `local:' directive can be used to prevent the symbol `original_foo'
   4276 from being exported. A `.symver' directive takes precedence over a
   4277 version script.
   4278 
   4279    The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
   4280 function to appear in a given shared library.  In this way you can make
   4281 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
   4282 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
   4283 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
   4284 
   4285    To do this, you must use multiple `.symver' directives in the source
   4286 file.  Here is an example:
   4287 
   4288      __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@");
   4289      __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo (a] VERS_1.1");
   4290      __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo (a] VERS_1.2");
   4291      __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@VERS_2.0");
   4292 
   4293    In this example, `foo@' represents the symbol `foo' bound to the
   4294 unspecified base version of the symbol.  The source file that contains
   4295 this example would define 4 C functions: `original_foo', `old_foo',
   4296 `old_foo1', and `new_foo'.
   4297 
   4298    When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to
   4299 be some way to specify a default version to which external references to
   4300 this symbol will be bound.  You can do this with the `foo@@VERS_2.0'
   4301 type of `.symver' directive.  You can only declare one version of a
   4302 symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise you would effectively
   4303 have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
   4304 
   4305    If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
   4306 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
   4307 (i.e., `old_foo'), or you can use the `.symver' directive to
   4308 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
   4309 
   4310    You can also specify the language in the version script:
   4311 
   4312      VERSION extern "lang" { version-script-commands }
   4313 
   4314    The supported `lang's are `C', `C++', and `Java'.  The linker will
   4315 iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and demangle them
   4316 according to `lang' before matching them to the patterns specified in
   4317 `version-script-commands'.  The default `lang' is `C'.
   4318 
   4319    Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters.  As
   4320 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
   4321 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly.  In
   4322 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
   4323 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
   4324 cause a mismatch.  As the exact string generated by the demangler might
   4325 change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you should
   4326 check that all of your version directives are behaving as you expect
   4327 when you upgrade.
   4328 
   4329 
   4330 File: ld.info,  Node: Expressions,  Next: Implicit Linker Scripts,  Prev: VERSION,  Up: Scripts
   4331 
   4332 3.10 Expressions in Linker Scripts
   4333 ==================================
   4334 
   4335 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
   4336 that of C expressions.  All expressions are evaluated as integers.  All
   4337 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
   4338 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
   4339 
   4340    You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
   4341 
   4342    The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use
   4343 in expressions.
   4344 
   4345 * Menu:
   4346 
   4347 * Constants::			Constants
   4348 * Symbolic Constants::          Symbolic constants
   4349 * Symbols::			Symbol Names
   4350 * Orphan Sections::		Orphan Sections
   4351 * Location Counter::		The Location Counter
   4352 * Operators::			Operators
   4353 * Evaluation::			Evaluation
   4354 * Expression Section::		The Section of an Expression
   4355 * Builtin Functions::		Builtin Functions
   4356 
   4357 
   4358 File: ld.info,  Node: Constants,  Next: Symbolic Constants,  Up: Expressions
   4359 
   4360 3.10.1 Constants
   4361 ----------------
   4362 
   4363 All constants are integers.
   4364 
   4365    As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with `0' to be
   4366 octal, and an integer beginning with `0x' or `0X' to be hexadecimal.
   4367 Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of `h' or `H' for
   4368 hexadeciaml, `o' or `O' for octal, `b' or `B' for binary and `d' or `D'
   4369 for decimal.  Any integer value without a prefix or a suffix is
   4370 considered to be decimal.
   4371 
   4372    In addition, you can use the suffixes `K' and `M' to scale a
   4373 constant by `1024' or `1024*1024' respectively.  For example, the
   4374 following all refer to the same quantity:
   4375 
   4376      _fourk_1 = 4K;
   4377      _fourk_2 = 4096;
   4378      _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
   4379      _fourk_4 = 10000o;
   4380 
   4381    Note - the `K' and `M' suffixes cannot be used in conjunction with
   4382 the base suffixes mentioned above.
   4383 
   4384 
   4385 File: ld.info,  Node: Symbolic Constants,  Next: Symbols,  Prev: Constants,  Up: Expressions
   4386 
   4387 3.10.2 Symbolic Constants
   4388 -------------------------
   4389 
   4390 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of the
   4391 `CONSTANT(NAME)' operator, where NAME is one of:
   4392 
   4393 `MAXPAGESIZE'
   4394      The target's maximum page size.
   4395 
   4396 `COMMONPAGESIZE'
   4397      The target's default page size.
   4398 
   4399    So for example:
   4400 
   4401        .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : { *(.text) }
   4402 
   4403    will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
   4404 supported by the target.
   4405 
   4406 
   4407 File: ld.info,  Node: Symbols,  Next: Orphan Sections,  Prev: Symbolic Constants,  Up: Expressions
   4408 
   4409 3.10.3 Symbol Names
   4410 -------------------
   4411 
   4412 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
   4413 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
   4414 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords.  You can
   4415 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
   4416 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
   4417      "SECTION" = 9;
   4418      "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
   4419 
   4420    Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is
   4421 safest to delimit symbols with spaces.  For example, `A-B' is one
   4422 symbol, whereas `A - B' is an expression involving subtraction.
   4423 
   4424 
   4425 File: ld.info,  Node: Orphan Sections,  Next: Location Counter,  Prev: Symbols,  Up: Expressions
   4426 
   4427 3.10.4 Orphan Sections
   4428 ----------------------
   4429 
   4430 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which are not
   4431 explicitly placed into the output file by the linker script.  The
   4432 linker will still copy these sections into the output file, but it has
   4433 to guess as to where they should be placed.  The linker uses a simple
   4434 heuristic to do this.  It attempts to place orphan sections after
   4435 non-orphan sections of the same attribute, such as code vs data,
   4436 loadable vs non-loadable, etc.  If there is not enough room to do this
   4437 then it places at the end of the file.
   4438 
   4439    For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type
   4440 as well as section flag.
   4441 
   4442    If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
   4443 the linker will automatically *note PROVIDE:: two symbols:
   4444 __start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
   4445 section.  These indicate the start address and end address of the
   4446 orphaned section respectively.  Note: most section names are not
   4447 representable as C identifiers because they contain a `.' character.
   4448 
   4449 
   4450 File: ld.info,  Node: Location Counter,  Next: Operators,  Prev: Orphan Sections,  Up: Expressions
   4451 
   4452 3.10.5 The Location Counter
   4453 ---------------------------
   4454 
   4455 The special linker variable "dot" `.' always contains the current
   4456 output location counter.  Since the `.' always refers to a location in
   4457 an output section, it may only appear in an expression within a
   4458 `SECTIONS' command.  The `.' symbol may appear anywhere that an
   4459 ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
   4460 
   4461    Assigning a value to `.' will cause the location counter to be
   4462 moved.  This may be used to create holes in the output section.  The
   4463 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
   4464 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so doing
   4465 creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
   4466 
   4467      SECTIONS
   4468      {
   4469        output :
   4470          {
   4471            file1(.text)
   4472            . = . + 1000;
   4473            file2(.text)
   4474            . += 1000;
   4475            file3(.text)
   4476          } = 0x12345678;
   4477      }
   4478    In the previous example, the `.text' section from `file1' is located
   4479 at the beginning of the output section `output'.  It is followed by a
   4480 1000 byte gap.  Then the `.text' section from `file2' appears, also
   4481 with a 1000 byte gap following before the `.text' section from `file3'.
   4482 The notation `= 0x12345678' specifies what data to write in the gaps
   4483 (*note Output Section Fill::).
   4484 
   4485    Note: `.' actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
   4486 current containing object.  Normally this is the `SECTIONS' statement,
   4487 whose start address is 0, hence `.' can be used as an absolute address.
   4488 If `.' is used inside a section description however, it refers to the
   4489 byte offset from the start of that section, not an absolute address.
   4490 Thus in a script like this:
   4491 
   4492      SECTIONS
   4493      {
   4494          . = 0x100
   4495          .text: {
   4496            *(.text)
   4497            . = 0x200
   4498          }
   4499          . = 0x500
   4500          .data: {
   4501            *(.data)
   4502            . += 0x600
   4503          }
   4504      }
   4505 
   4506    The `.text' section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100 and
   4507 a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in the
   4508 `.text' input sections to fill this area.  (If there is too much data,
   4509 an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to move `.'
   4510 backwards).  The `.data' section will start at 0x500 and it will have
   4511 an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of the values from
   4512 the `.data' input sections and before the end of the `.data' output
   4513 section itself.
   4514 
   4515    Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
   4516 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
   4517 needs to place orphan sections.  For example, given the following:
   4518 
   4519      SECTIONS
   4520      {
   4521          start_of_text = . ;
   4522          .text: { *(.text) }
   4523          end_of_text = . ;
   4524 
   4525          start_of_data = . ;
   4526          .data: { *(.data) }
   4527          end_of_data = . ;
   4528      }
   4529 
   4530    If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. `.rodata', not
   4531 mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section between
   4532 `.text' and `.data'.  You might think the linker should place `.rodata'
   4533 on the blank line in the above script, but blank lines are of no
   4534 particular significance to the linker.  As well, the linker doesn't
   4535 associate the above symbol names with their sections.  Instead, it
   4536 assumes that all assignments or other statements belong to the previous
   4537 output section, except for the special case of an assignment to `.'.
   4538 I.e., the linker will place the orphan `.rodata' section as if the
   4539 script was written as follows:
   4540 
   4541      SECTIONS
   4542      {
   4543          start_of_text = . ;
   4544          .text: { *(.text) }
   4545          end_of_text = . ;
   4546 
   4547          start_of_data = . ;
   4548          .rodata: { *(.rodata) }
   4549          .data: { *(.data) }
   4550          end_of_data = . ;
   4551      }
   4552 
   4553    This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
   4554 `start_of_data'.  One way to influence the orphan section placement is
   4555 to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker assumes that an
   4556 assignment to `.' is setting the start address of a following output
   4557 section and thus should be grouped with that section.  So you could
   4558 write:
   4559 
   4560      SECTIONS
   4561      {
   4562          start_of_text = . ;
   4563          .text: { *(.text) }
   4564          end_of_text = . ;
   4565 
   4566          . = . ;
   4567          start_of_data = . ;
   4568          .data: { *(.data) }
   4569          end_of_data = . ;
   4570      }
   4571 
   4572    Now, the orphan `.rodata' section will be placed between
   4573 `end_of_text' and `start_of_data'.
   4574 
   4575 
   4576 File: ld.info,  Node: Operators,  Next: Evaluation,  Prev: Location Counter,  Up: Expressions
   4577 
   4578 3.10.6 Operators
   4579 ----------------
   4580 
   4581 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
   4582 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
   4583      precedence      associativity   Operators                Notes
   4584      (highest)
   4585      1               left            !  -  ~                  (1)
   4586      2               left            *  /  %
   4587      3               left            +  -
   4588      4               left            >>  <<
   4589      5               left            ==  !=  >  <  <=  >=
   4590      6               left            &
   4591      7               left            |
   4592      8               left            &&
   4593      9               left            ||
   4594      10              right           ? :
   4595      11              right           &=  +=  -=  *=  /=       (2)
   4596      (lowest)
   4597    Notes: (1) Prefix operators (2) *Note Assignments::.
   4598 
   4599 
   4600 File: ld.info,  Node: Evaluation,  Next: Expression Section,  Prev: Operators,  Up: Expressions
   4601 
   4602 3.10.7 Evaluation
   4603 -----------------
   4604 
   4605 The linker evaluates expressions lazily.  It only computes the value of
   4606 an expression when absolutely necessary.
   4607 
   4608    The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
   4609 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
   4610 regions, in order to do any linking at all.  These values are computed
   4611 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
   4612 
   4613    However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
   4614 until after storage allocation.  Such values are evaluated later, when
   4615 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
   4616 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
   4617 
   4618    The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
   4619 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
   4620 allocation.
   4621 
   4622    Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
   4623 `.', must be evaluated during section allocation.
   4624 
   4625    If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
   4626 available, then an error results.  For example, a script like the
   4627 following
   4628      SECTIONS
   4629        {
   4630          .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
   4631            { *(.text) }
   4632        }
   4633 will cause the error message `non constant expression for initial
   4634 address'.
   4635 
   4636 
   4637 File: ld.info,  Node: Expression Section,  Next: Builtin Functions,  Prev: Evaluation,  Up: Expressions
   4638 
   4639 3.10.8 The Section of an Expression
   4640 -----------------------------------
   4641 
   4642 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute.  A section
   4643 relative symbol is relocatable.  If you request relocatable output
   4644 using the `-r' option, a further link operation may change the value of
   4645 a section relative symbol.  On the other hand, an absolute symbol will
   4646 retain the same value throughout any further link operations.
   4647 
   4648    Some terms in linker expressions are addresses.  This is true of
   4649 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
   4650 address, such as `ADDR', `LOADADDR', `ORIGIN' and `SEGMENT_START'.
   4651 Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin functions that return a
   4652 non-address value, such as `LENGTH'.  One complication is that unless
   4653 you set `LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")' (*note Miscellaneous Commands::),
   4654 numbers and absolute symbols are treated differently depending on their
   4655 location, for compatibility with older versions of `ld'.  Expressions
   4656 appearing outside an output section definition treat all numbers as
   4657 absolute addresses.  Expressions appearing inside an output section
   4658 definition treat absolute symbols as numbers.  If `LD_FEATURE
   4659 ("SANE_EXPR")' is given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply
   4660 treated as numbers everywhere.
   4661 
   4662    In the following simple example,
   4663 
   4664      SECTIONS
   4665        {
   4666          . = 0x100;
   4667          __executable_start = 0x100;
   4668          .data :
   4669          {
   4670            . = 0x10;
   4671            __data_start = 0x10;
   4672            *(.data)
   4673          }
   4674          ...
   4675        }
   4676 
   4677    both `.' and `__executable_start' are set to the absolute address
   4678 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both `.' and `__data_start'
   4679 are set to 0x10 relative to the `.data' section in the second two
   4680 assignments.
   4681 
   4682    For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
   4683 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
   4684 
   4685    * Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on
   4686      two relative addresses in the same section or between one relative
   4687      address and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the
   4688      address(es).
   4689 
   4690    * Unary operations on an absolute address, and binary operations on
   4691      one or more absolute addresses or on two relative addresses not in
   4692      the same section, first convert any non-absolute term to an
   4693      absolute address before applying the operator.
   4694 
   4695    The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
   4696 
   4697    * An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
   4698 
   4699    * The result of comparisons, `&&' and `||' is also a number.
   4700 
   4701    * The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
   4702      relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresess
   4703      (after above conversions) is also a number.
   4704 
   4705    * The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
   4706      relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
   4707      section as the relative operand(s).
   4708 
   4709    * The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
   4710      conversions) is an absolute address.
   4711 
   4712    You can use the builtin function `ABSOLUTE' to force an expression
   4713 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative.  For example, to
   4714 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
   4715 section `.data':
   4716      SECTIONS
   4717        {
   4718          .data : { *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); }
   4719        }
   4720    If `ABSOLUTE' were not used, `_edata' would be relative to the
   4721 `.data' section.
   4722 
   4723    Using `LOADADDR' also forces an expression absolute, since this
   4724 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
   4725 
   4726 
   4727 File: ld.info,  Node: Builtin Functions,  Prev: Expression Section,  Up: Expressions
   4728 
   4729 3.10.9 Builtin Functions
   4730 ------------------------
   4731 
   4732 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
   4733 use in linker script expressions.
   4734 
   4735 `ABSOLUTE(EXP)'
   4736      Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative)
   4737      value of the expression EXP.  Primarily useful to assign an
   4738      absolute value to a symbol within a section definition, where
   4739      symbol values are normally section relative.  *Note Expression
   4740      Section::.
   4741 
   4742 `ADDR(SECTION)'
   4743      Return the address (VMA) of the named SECTION.  Your script must
   4744      previously have defined the location of that section.  In the
   4745      following example, `start_of_output_1', `symbol_1' and `symbol_2'
   4746      are assigned equivalent values, except that `symbol_1' will be
   4747      relative to the `.output1' section while the other two will be
   4748      absolute:
   4749           SECTIONS { ...
   4750             .output1 :
   4751               {
   4752               start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
   4753               ...
   4754               }
   4755             .output :
   4756               {
   4757               symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
   4758               symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
   4759               }
   4760           ... }
   4761 
   4762 `ALIGN(ALIGN)'
   4763 `ALIGN(EXP,ALIGN)'
   4764      Return the location counter (`.') or arbitrary expression aligned
   4765      to the next ALIGN boundary.  The single operand `ALIGN' doesn't
   4766      change the value of the location counter--it just does arithmetic
   4767      on it.  The two operand `ALIGN' allows an arbitrary expression to
   4768      be aligned upwards (`ALIGN(ALIGN)' is equivalent to `ALIGN(.,
   4769      ALIGN)').
   4770 
   4771      Here is an example which aligns the output `.data' section to the
   4772      next `0x2000' byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
   4773      variable within the section to the next `0x8000' boundary after the
   4774      input sections:
   4775           SECTIONS { ...
   4776             .data ALIGN(0x2000): {
   4777               *(.data)
   4778               variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
   4779             }
   4780           ... }
   4781      The first use of `ALIGN' in this example specifies the
   4782      location of a section because it is used as the optional ADDRESS
   4783      attribute of a section definition (*note Output Section
   4784      Address::).  The second use of `ALIGN' is used to defines the
   4785      value of a symbol.
   4786 
   4787      The builtin function `NEXT' is closely related to `ALIGN'.
   4788 
   4789 `ALIGNOF(SECTION)'
   4790      Return the alignment in bytes of the named SECTION, if that
   4791      section has been allocated.  If the section has not been allocated
   4792      when this is evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the
   4793      following example, the alignment of the `.output' section is
   4794      stored as the first value in that section.
   4795           SECTIONS{ ...
   4796             .output {
   4797               LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
   4798               ...
   4799               }
   4800           ... }
   4801 
   4802 `BLOCK(EXP)'
   4803      This is a synonym for `ALIGN', for compatibility with older linker
   4804      scripts.  It is most often seen when setting the address of an
   4805      output section.
   4806 
   4807 `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE, COMMONPAGESIZE)'
   4808      This is equivalent to either
   4809           (ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE) + (. & (MAXPAGESIZE - 1)))
   4810      or
   4811           (ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE) + (. & (MAXPAGESIZE - COMMONPAGESIZE)))
   4812      depending on whether the latter uses fewer COMMONPAGESIZE sized
   4813      pages for the data segment (area between the result of this
   4814      expression and `DATA_SEGMENT_END') than the former or not.  If the
   4815      latter form is used, it means COMMONPAGESIZE bytes of runtime
   4816      memory will be saved at the expense of up to COMMONPAGESIZE wasted
   4817      bytes in the on-disk file.
   4818 
   4819      This expression can only be used directly in `SECTIONS' commands,
   4820      not in any output section descriptions and only once in the linker
   4821      script.  COMMONPAGESIZE should be less or equal to MAXPAGESIZE and
   4822      should be the system page size the object wants to be optimized
   4823      for (while still working on system page sizes up to MAXPAGESIZE).
   4824 
   4825      Example:
   4826             . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
   4827 
   4828 `DATA_SEGMENT_END(EXP)'
   4829      This defines the end of data segment for `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN'
   4830      evaluation purposes.
   4831 
   4832             . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
   4833 
   4834 `DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(OFFSET, EXP)'
   4835      This defines the end of the `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment when `-z relro'
   4836      option is used.  Second argument is returned.  When `-z relro'
   4837      option is not present, `DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END' does nothing,
   4838      otherwise `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN' is padded so that EXP + OFFSET is
   4839      aligned to the most commonly used page boundary for particular
   4840      target.  If present in the linker script, it must always come in
   4841      between `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN' and `DATA_SEGMENT_END'.
   4842 
   4843             . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
   4844 
   4845 `DEFINED(SYMBOL)'
   4846      Return 1 if SYMBOL is in the linker global symbol table and is
   4847      defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
   4848      return 0.  You can use this function to provide default values for
   4849      symbols.  For example, the following script fragment shows how to
   4850      set a global symbol `begin' to the first location in the `.text'
   4851      section--but if a symbol called `begin' already existed, its value
   4852      is preserved:
   4853 
   4854           SECTIONS { ...
   4855             .text : {
   4856               begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
   4857               ...
   4858             }
   4859             ...
   4860           }
   4861 
   4862 `LENGTH(MEMORY)'
   4863      Return the length of the memory region named MEMORY.
   4864 
   4865 `LOADADDR(SECTION)'
   4866      Return the absolute LMA of the named SECTION.  (*note Output
   4867      Section LMA::).
   4868 
   4869 `MAX(EXP1, EXP2)'
   4870      Returns the maximum of EXP1 and EXP2.
   4871 
   4872 `MIN(EXP1, EXP2)'
   4873      Returns the minimum of EXP1 and EXP2.
   4874 
   4875 `NEXT(EXP)'
   4876      Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of EXP.
   4877      This function is closely related to `ALIGN(EXP)'; unless you use
   4878      the `MEMORY' command to define discontinuous memory for the output
   4879      file, the two functions are equivalent.
   4880 
   4881 `ORIGIN(MEMORY)'
   4882      Return the origin of the memory region named MEMORY.
   4883 
   4884 `SEGMENT_START(SEGMENT, DEFAULT)'
   4885      Return the base address of the named SEGMENT.  If an explicit
   4886      value has been given for this segment (with a command-line `-T'
   4887      option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
   4888      DEFAULT.  At present, the `-T' command-line option can only be
   4889      used to set the base address for the "text", "data", and "bss"
   4890      sections, but you can use `SEGMENT_START' with any segment name.
   4891 
   4892 `SIZEOF(SECTION)'
   4893      Return the size in bytes of the named SECTION, if that section has
   4894      been allocated.  If the section has not been allocated when this is
   4895      evaluated, the linker will report an error.  In the following
   4896      example, `symbol_1' and `symbol_2' are assigned identical values:
   4897           SECTIONS{ ...
   4898             .output {
   4899               .start = . ;
   4900               ...
   4901               .end = . ;
   4902               }
   4903             symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
   4904             symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
   4905           ... }
   4906 
   4907 `SIZEOF_HEADERS'
   4908 `sizeof_headers'
   4909      Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers.  This is
   4910      information which appears at the start of the output file.  You
   4911      can use this number when setting the start address of the first
   4912      section, if you choose, to facilitate paging.
   4913 
   4914      When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
   4915      `SIZEOF_HEADERS' builtin function, the linker must compute the
   4916      number of program headers before it has determined all the section
   4917      addresses and sizes.  If the linker later discovers that it needs
   4918      additional program headers, it will report an error `not enough
   4919      room for program headers'.  To avoid this error, you must avoid
   4920      using the `SIZEOF_HEADERS' function, or you must rework your linker
   4921      script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program
   4922      headers, or you must define the program headers yourself using the
   4923      `PHDRS' command (*note PHDRS::).
   4924 
   4925 
   4926 File: ld.info,  Node: Implicit Linker Scripts,  Prev: Expressions,  Up: Scripts
   4927 
   4928 3.11 Implicit Linker Scripts
   4929 ============================
   4930 
   4931 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
   4932 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
   4933 linker script.  If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
   4934 linker will report an error.
   4935 
   4936    An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
   4937 
   4938    Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
   4939 assignments, or the `INPUT', `GROUP', or `VERSION' commands.
   4940 
   4941    Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be
   4942 read at the position in the command line where the implicit linker
   4943 script was read.  This can affect archive searching.
   4944 
   4945 
   4946 File: ld.info,  Node: Machine Dependent,  Next: BFD,  Prev: Scripts,  Up: Top
   4947 
   4948 4 Machine Dependent Features
   4949 ****************************
   4950 
   4951 `ld' has additional features on some platforms; the following sections
   4952 describe them.  Machines where `ld' has no additional functionality are
   4953 not listed.
   4954 
   4955 * Menu:
   4956 
   4957 
   4958 * H8/300::                      `ld' and the H8/300
   4959 
   4960 * i960::                        `ld' and the Intel 960 family
   4961 
   4962 * ARM::				`ld' and the ARM family
   4963 
   4964 * HPPA ELF32::                  `ld' and HPPA 32-bit ELF
   4965 
   4966 * M68K::			`ld' and the Motorola 68K family
   4967 
   4968 * MMIX::			`ld' and MMIX
   4969 
   4970 * MSP430::			`ld' and MSP430
   4971 
   4972 * M68HC11/68HC12::		`ld' and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
   4973 
   4974 * PowerPC ELF32::		`ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
   4975 
   4976 * PowerPC64 ELF64::		`ld' and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
   4977 
   4978 * SPU ELF::			`ld' and SPU ELF Support
   4979 
   4980 * TI COFF::                     `ld' and TI COFF
   4981 
   4982 * WIN32::                       `ld' and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
   4983 
   4984 * Xtensa::                      `ld' and Xtensa Processors
   4985 
   4986 
   4987 File: ld.info,  Node: H8/300,  Next: i960,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4988 
   4989 4.1 `ld' and the H8/300
   4990 =======================
   4991 
   4992 For the H8/300, `ld' can perform these global optimizations when you
   4993 specify the `--relax' command-line option.
   4994 
   4995 _relaxing address modes_
   4996      `ld' finds all `jsr' and `jmp' instructions whose targets are
   4997      within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit program-counter
   4998      relative `bsr' and `bra' instructions, respectively.
   4999 
   5000 _synthesizing instructions_
   5001      `ld' finds all `mov.b' instructions which use the sixteen-bit
   5002      absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
   5003      changes them to use the eight-bit address form.  (That is: the
   5004      linker turns `mov.b `@'AA:16' into `mov.b `@'AA:8' whenever the
   5005      address AA is in the top page of memory).
   5006 
   5007 _bit manipulation instructions_
   5008      `ld' finds all bit manipulation instructions like `band, bclr,
   5009      biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst,
   5010      bxor' which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer
   5011      to the top page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit
   5012      address form.  (That is: the linker turns `bset #xx:3,`@'AA:32'
   5013      into `bset #xx:3,`@'AA:8' whenever the address AA is in the top
   5014      page of memory).
   5015 
   5016 _system control instructions_
   5017      `ld' finds all `ldc.w, stc.w' instructions which use the 32 bit
   5018      absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
   5019      changes them to use 16 bit address form.  (That is: the linker
   5020      turns `ldc.w `@'AA:32,ccr' into `ldc.w `@'AA:16,ccr' whenever the
   5021      address AA is in the top page of memory).
   5022 
   5023 
   5024 File: ld.info,  Node: i960,  Next: ARM,  Prev: H8/300,  Up: Machine Dependent
   5025 
   5026 4.2 `ld' and the Intel 960 Family
   5027 =================================
   5028 
   5029 You can use the `-AARCHITECTURE' command line option to specify one of
   5030 the two-letter names identifying members of the 960 family; the option
   5031 specifies the desired output target, and warns of any incompatible
   5032 instructions in the input files.  It also modifies the linker's search
   5033 strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of libraries
   5034 specific to each particular architecture, by including in the search
   5035 loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
   5036 
   5037    For example, if your `ld' command line included `-ACA' as well as
   5038 `-ltry', the linker would look (in its built-in search paths, and in
   5039 any paths you specify with `-L') for a library with the names
   5040 
   5041      try
   5042      libtry.a
   5043      tryca
   5044      libtryca.a
   5045 
   5046 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
   5047 two are due to the use of `-ACA'.
   5048 
   5049    You can meaningfully use `-A' more than once on a command line, since
   5050 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures;
   5051 each use will add another pair of name variants to search for when `-l'
   5052 specifies a library.
   5053 
   5054    `ld' supports the `--relax' option for the i960 family.  If you
   5055 specify `--relax', `ld' finds all `balx' and `calx' instructions whose
   5056 targets are within 24 bits, and turns them into 24-bit program-counter
   5057 relative `bal' and `cal' instructions, respectively.  `ld' also turns
   5058 `cal' instructions into `bal' instructions when it determines that the
   5059 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
   5060 not itself call any subroutines).
   5061 
   5062    The `--fix-cortex-a8' switch enables a link-time workaround for an
   5063 erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors.  The workaround is enabled by
   5064 default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile.  It can
   5065 be enabled otherwise by specifying `--fix-cortex-a8', or disabled
   5066 unconditionally by specifying `--no-fix-cortex-a8'.
   5067 
   5068    The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code.  Please contact ARM for
   5069 further details.
   5070 
   5071    The `--no-merge-exidx-entries' switch disables the merging of
   5072 adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
   5073 
   5074 
   5075 File: ld.info,  Node: M68HC11/68HC12,  Next: PowerPC ELF32,  Prev: MSP430,  Up: Machine Dependent
   5076 
   5077 4.3 `ld' and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
   5078 ====================================================
   5079 
   5080 4.3.1 Linker Relaxation
   5081 -----------------------
   5082 
   5083 For the Motorola 68HC11, `ld' can perform these global optimizations
   5084 when you specify the `--relax' command-line option.
   5085 
   5086 _relaxing address modes_
   5087      `ld' finds all `jsr' and `jmp' instructions whose targets are
   5088      within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit program-counter
   5089      relative `bsr' and `bra' instructions, respectively.
   5090 
   5091      `ld' also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
   5092      transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
   5093      page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
   5094 
   5095 _relaxing gcc instruction group_
   5096      When `gcc' is called with `-mrelax', it can emit group of
   5097      instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
   5098      addressing mode. These instructions consists of `bclr' or `bset'
   5099      instructions.
   5100 
   5101 
   5102 4.3.2 Trampoline Generation
   5103 ---------------------------
   5104 
   5105 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, `ld' can generate trampoline code to call a far
   5106 function using a normal `jsr' instruction. The linker will also change
   5107 the relocation to some far function to use the trampoline address
   5108 instead of the function address. This is typically the case when a
   5109 pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact point to the
   5110 function trampoline.
   5111 
   5112 
   5113 File: ld.info,  Node: ARM,  Next: HPPA ELF32,  Prev: i960,  Up: Machine Dependent
   5114 
   5115 4.4 `ld' and the ARM family
   5116 ===========================
   5117 
   5118 For the ARM, `ld' will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
   5119 between ARM and Thumb code.  These stubs only work with code that has
   5120 been compiled and assembled with the `-mthumb-interwork' command line
   5121 option.  If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
   5122 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
   5123 option then the `--support-old-code' command line switch should be
   5124 given to the linker.  This will make it generate larger stub functions
   5125 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code.  Note, however,
   5126 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
   5127 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
   5128 
   5129    The `--thumb-entry' switch is a duplicate of the generic `--entry'
   5130 switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.  But it also
   5131 sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be branched to using
   5132 a BX instruction, and the program will start executing in Thumb mode
   5133 straight away.
   5134 
   5135    The `--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables' switch is specifying, that
   5136 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
   5137 elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
   5138 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
   5139 
   5140    The `--be8' switch instructs `ld' to generate BE8 format
   5141 executables.  This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
   5142 The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
   5143 
   5144    The `R_ARM_TARGET1' relocation is typically used for entries in the
   5145 `.init_array' section.  It is interpreted as either `R_ARM_REL32' or
   5146 `R_ARM_ABS32', depending on the target.  The `--target1-rel' and
   5147 `--target1-abs' switches override the default.
   5148 
   5149    The `--target2=type' switch overrides the default definition of the
   5150 `R_ARM_TARGET2' relocation.  Valid values for `type', their meanings,
   5151 and target defaults are as follows:
   5152 `rel'
   5153      `R_ARM_REL32' (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
   5154 
   5155 `abs'
   5156      `R_ARM_ABS32' (arm*-*-symbianelf)
   5157 
   5158 `got-rel'
   5159      `R_ARM_GOT_PREL' (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
   5160 
   5161    The `R_ARM_V4BX' relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF specification)
   5162 enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
   5163 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t,
   5164 but also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4
   5165 objects.
   5166 
   5167    In the latter case, the switch `--fix-v4bx' must be passed to the
   5168 linker, which causes v4t `BX rM' instructions to be rewritten as `MOV
   5169 PC,rM', since v4 processors do not have a `BX' instruction.
   5170 
   5171    In the former case, the switch should not be used, and `R_ARM_V4BX'
   5172 relocations are ignored.
   5173 
   5174    Replace `BX rM' instructions identified by `R_ARM_V4BX' relocations
   5175 with a branch to the following veneer:
   5176 
   5177      TST rM, #1
   5178      MOVEQ PC, rM
   5179      BX Rn
   5180 
   5181    This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4
   5182 cores and are still interworking safe.  Note that the above veneer
   5183 clobbers the condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in
   5184 rare cases.
   5185 
   5186    The `--use-blx' switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb BLX
   5187 instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various situations.
   5188 Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb code using
   5189 BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before each PLT
   5190 entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
   5191 
   5192    This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need
   5193 to specify it if you are using that target.
   5194 
   5195    The `--vfp11-denorm-fix' switch enables a link-time workaround for a
   5196 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
   5197 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support
   5198 code) to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions
   5199 before the support code can read the intended values.
   5200 
   5201    The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
   5202 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a
   5203 register and another instruction which writes to the same register, or
   5204 at least two intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug
   5205 only affects full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this
   5206 workaround if you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for
   5207 further details.
   5208 
   5209    If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can enable this
   5210 workaround by specifying the linker option `--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar' if
   5211 you are using the VFP11 scalar mode only, or `--vfp-denorm-fix=vector'
   5212 if you are using vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code).
   5213 The default is `--vfp-denorm-fix=none'.
   5214 
   5215    If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
   5216 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
   5217 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
   5218 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
   5219 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
   5220 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
   5221 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
   5222 
   5223    The `--fix-arm1176' switch enables a link-time workaround for an
   5224 erratum in certain ARM1176 processors.  The workaround is enabled by
   5225 default if you are targetting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier.
   5226 It can be disabled unconditionally by specifying `--no-fix-arm1176'.
   5227 
   5228    Further information is available in the "ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
   5229 Programmer Advice Notice" available on the ARM documentaion website at:
   5230 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
   5231 
   5232    The `--no-enum-size-warning' switch prevents the linker from warning
   5233 when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI enumeration
   5234 size attributes.  For example, with this switch enabled, linking of an
   5235 object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another using
   5236 enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will not be
   5237 diagnosed.
   5238 
   5239    The `--no-wchar-size-warning' switch prevents the linker from
   5240 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
   5241 `wchar_t' size attributes.  For example, with this switch enabled,
   5242 linking of an object file using 32-bit `wchar_t' values with another
   5243 using 16-bit `wchar_t' values will not be diagnosed.
   5244 
   5245    The `--pic-veneer' switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
   5246 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary is not
   5247 PIC.  This avoids problems on uClinux targets where `--emit-relocs' is
   5248 used to generate relocatable binaries.
   5249 
   5250    The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
   5251 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
   5252 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away.  The
   5253 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
   5254 controlled by the command line option `--stub-group-size=N'.  The
   5255 placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
   5256 duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw.  The linker will try to
   5257 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
   5258 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
   5259 where they should be placed.
   5260 
   5261    The value of `N', the parameter to the `--stub-group-size=' option
   5262 controls where the stub groups are placed.  If it is negative then all
   5263 stubs are placed after the first branch that needs them.  If it is
   5264 positive then the stubs can be placed either before or after the
   5265 branches that need them.  If the value of `N' is 1 (either +1 or -1)
   5266 then the linker will choose exactly where to place groups of stubs,
   5267 using its built in heuristics.  A value of `N' greater than 1 (or
   5268 smaller than -1) tells the linker that a single group of stubs can
   5269 service at most `N' bytes from the input sections.
   5270 
   5271    The default, if `--stub-group-size=' is not specified, is `N = +1'.
   5272 
   5273    Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
   5274 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
   5275 otherwise.
   5276 
   5277 
   5278 File: ld.info,  Node: HPPA ELF32,  Next: M68K,  Prev: ARM,  Up: Machine Dependent
   5279 
   5280 4.5 `ld' and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
   5281 ====================================
   5282 
   5283 When generating a shared library, `ld' will by default generate import
   5284 stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.  The
   5285 `--multi-subspace' switch causes `ld' to generate export stubs, and
   5286 different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with multiple
   5287 sub-spaces.
   5288 
   5289    Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by `ld' in stub
   5290 sections located between groups of input sections.  `--stub-group-size'
   5291 specifies the maximum size of a group of input sections handled by one
   5292 stub section.  Since branch offsets are signed, a stub section may
   5293 serve two groups of input sections, one group before the stub section,
   5294 and one group after it.  However, when using conditional branches that
   5295 require stubs, it may be better (for branch prediction) that stub
   5296 sections only serve one group of input sections.  A negative value for
   5297 `N' chooses this scheme, ensuring that branches to stubs always use a
   5298 negative offset.  Two special values of `N' are recognized, `1' and
   5299 `-1'.  These both instruct `ld' to automatically size input section
   5300 groups for the branch types detected, with the same behaviour regarding
   5301 stub placement as other positive or negative values of `N' respectively.
   5302 
   5303    Note that `--stub-group-size' does not split input sections.  A
   5304 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
   5305 create a larger group (of one section).  If input sections are too
   5306 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
   5307 
   5308 
   5309 File: ld.info,  Node: M68K,  Next: MMIX,  Prev: HPPA ELF32,  Up: Machine Dependent
   5310 
   5311 4.6 `ld' and the Motorola 68K family
   5312 ====================================
   5313 
   5314 The `--got=TYPE' option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.  The
   5315 choices are `single', `negative', `multigot' and `target'.  When
   5316 `target' is selected the linker chooses the default GOT generation
   5317 scheme for the current target.  `single' tells the linker to generate a
   5318 single GOT with entries only at non-negative offsets.  `negative'
   5319 instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with entries at both
   5320 negative and positive offsets.  Not all environments support such GOTs.
   5321 `multigot' allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the output
   5322 file.  All GOT references from a single input object file access the
   5323 same GOT, but references from different input object files might access
   5324 different GOTs.  Not all environments support such GOTs.
   5325 
   5326 
   5327 File: ld.info,  Node: MMIX,  Next: MSP430,  Prev: M68K,  Up: Machine Dependent
   5328 
   5329 4.7 `ld' and MMIX
   5330 =================
   5331 
   5332 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating `ELF' object files or `mmo'
   5333 object files when linking.  The simulator `mmix' understands the `mmo'
   5334 format.  The binutils `objcopy' utility can translate between the two
   5335 formats.
   5336 
   5337    There is one special section, the `.MMIX.reg_contents' section.
   5338 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
   5339 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special
   5340 symbols, equal to registers.  In a final link, the start address of the
   5341 `.MMIX.reg_contents' section corresponds to the first allocated global
   5342 register multiplied by 8.  Register `$255' is not included in this
   5343 section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the symbol
   5344 `Main' for `mmo' files.
   5345 
   5346    Global symbols with the prefix `__.MMIX.start.', for example
   5347 `__.MMIX.start..text' and `__.MMIX.start..data' are special.  The
   5348 default linker script uses these to set the default start address of a
   5349 section.
   5350 
   5351    Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a
   5352 section, are left out from an mmo file.
   5353 
   5354 
   5355 File: ld.info,  Node: MSP430,  Next: M68HC11/68HC12,  Prev: MMIX,  Up: Machine Dependent
   5356 
   5357 4.8 `ld' and MSP430
   5358 ===================
   5359 
   5360 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture.  The flag
   5361 `-m [mpu type]' will select an appropriate linker script for selected
   5362 MPU type.  (To get a list of known MPUs just pass `-m help' option to
   5363 the linker).
   5364 
   5365    The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430
   5366 specific:
   5367 
   5368 ``.vectors''
   5369      Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
   5370 
   5371 ``.bootloader''
   5372      Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable).  Any
   5373      code in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
   5374 
   5375 ``.infomem''
   5376      Defines an information memory section (if applicable).  Any code in
   5377      this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
   5378 
   5379 ``.infomemnobits''
   5380      This is the same as the `.infomem' section except that any code in
   5381      this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
   5382 
   5383 ``.noinit''
   5384      Denotes a portion of RAM located above `.bss' section.
   5385 
   5386      The last two sections are used by gcc.
   5387 
   5388 
   5389 File: ld.info,  Node: PowerPC ELF32,  Next: PowerPC64 ELF64,  Prev: M68HC11/68HC12,  Up: Machine Dependent
   5390 
   5391 4.9 `ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
   5392 =======================================
   5393 
   5394 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
   5395 displacement, which may result in `ld' giving `relocation truncated to
   5396 fit' errors with very large programs.  `--relax' enables the generation
   5397 of trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space.  These
   5398 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
   5399 be reachable if an input section exceeds 33M in size.  You may combine
   5400 `-r' and `--relax' to add trampolines in a partial link.  In that case
   5401 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
   5402 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
   5403 
   5404 `--bss-plt'
   5405      Current PowerPC GCC accepts a `-msecure-plt' option that generates
   5406      code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has the
   5407      security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
   5408      writable and no writable section ever being executable.  PowerPC
   5409      `ld' will generate this layout, including stubs to access the PLT,
   5410      if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
   5411      compiled with `-msecure-plt'.  `--bss-plt' forces the old BSS PLT
   5412      (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
   5413 
   5414 `--secure-plt'
   5415      `ld' will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
   5416      `-fpic' or `-fPIC' code, but does not do so automatically when
   5417      linking non-PIC code.  This option requests the new PLT and GOT
   5418      layout.  A warning will be given if some object file requires the
   5419      old style BSS PLT.
   5420 
   5421 `--sdata-got'
   5422      The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
   5423      sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement.  The
   5424      location of `.plt' must change because the new secure PLT is an
   5425      initialized section while the old PLT is uninitialized.  The
   5426      reason for the `.got' change is more subtle:  The new placement
   5427      allows `.got' to be read-only in applications linked with `-z
   5428      relro -z now'.  However, this placement means that `.sdata' cannot
   5429      always be used in shared libraries, because the PowerPC ABI
   5430      accesses `.sdata' in shared libraries from the GOT pointer.
   5431      `--sdata-got' forces the old GOT placement.  PowerPC GCC doesn't
   5432      use `.sdata' in shared libraries, so this option is really only
   5433      useful for other compilers that may do so.
   5434 
   5435 `--emit-stub-syms'
   5436      This option causes `ld' to label linker stubs with a local symbol
   5437      that encodes the stub type and destination.
   5438 
   5439 `--no-tls-optimize'
   5440      PowerPC `ld' normally performs some optimization of code sequences
   5441      used to access Thread-Local Storage.  Use this option to disable
   5442      the optimization.
   5443 
   5444 
   5445 File: ld.info,  Node: PowerPC64 ELF64,  Next: SPU ELF,  Prev: PowerPC ELF32,  Up: Machine Dependent
   5446 
   5447 4.10 `ld' and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
   5448 ==========================================
   5449 
   5450 `--stub-group-size'
   5451      Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs  and TOC adjusting stubs are
   5452      placed by `ld' in stub sections located between groups of input
   5453      sections.  `--stub-group-size' specifies the maximum size of a
   5454      group of input sections handled by one stub section.  Since branch
   5455      offsets are signed, a stub section may serve two groups of input
   5456      sections, one group before the stub section, and one group after
   5457      it.  However, when using conditional branches that require stubs,
   5458      it may be better (for branch prediction) that stub sections only
   5459      serve one group of input sections.  A negative value for `N'
   5460      chooses this scheme, ensuring that branches to stubs always use a
   5461      negative offset.  Two special values of `N' are recognized, `1'
   5462      and `-1'.  These both instruct `ld' to automatically size input
   5463      section groups for the branch types detected, with the same
   5464      behaviour regarding stub placement as other positive or negative
   5465      values of `N' respectively.
   5466 
   5467      Note that `--stub-group-size' does not split input sections.  A
   5468      single input section larger than the group size specified will of
   5469      course create a larger group (of one section).  If input sections
   5470      are too large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its
   5471      stub.
   5472 
   5473 `--emit-stub-syms'
   5474      This option causes `ld' to label linker stubs with a local symbol
   5475      that encodes the stub type and destination.
   5476 
   5477 `--dotsyms, --no-dotsyms'
   5478      These two options control how `ld' interprets version patterns in
   5479      a version script.  Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
   5480      function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and
   5481      a code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (`.').  To
   5482      properly version a function `foo', the version script thus needs
   5483      to control both `foo' and `.foo'.  The option `--dotsyms', on by
   5484      default, automatically adds the required dot-prefixed patterns.
   5485      Use `--no-dotsyms' to disable this feature.
   5486 
   5487 `--no-tls-optimize'
   5488      PowerPC64 `ld' normally performs some optimization of code
   5489      sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage.  Use this option to
   5490      disable the optimization.
   5491 
   5492 `--no-opd-optimize'
   5493      PowerPC64 `ld' normally removes `.opd' section entries
   5494      corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed
   5495      by the action of `--gc-sections' or linker script `/DISCARD/'.
   5496      Use this option to disable `.opd' optimization.
   5497 
   5498 `--non-overlapping-opd'
   5499      Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
   5500      `.opd' entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
   5501      the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the
   5502      next entry.  This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
   5503 
   5504 `--no-toc-optimize'
   5505      PowerPC64 `ld' normally removes unused `.toc' section entries.
   5506      Such entries are detected by examining relocations that reference
   5507      the TOC in code sections.  A reloc in a deleted code section marks
   5508      a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section marks
   5509      a TOC word as needed.  Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
   5510      relocs are also examined.  TOC words marked as both needed and
   5511      unneeded will of course be kept.  TOC words without any referencing
   5512      reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
   5513      discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word.  This works
   5514      reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if
   5515      assembly code is used to insert TOC entries.  Use this option to
   5516      disable the optimization.
   5517 
   5518 `--no-multi-toc'
   5519      By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
   5520      entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2.  This limits the
   5521      total TOC size to 64K.  PowerPC64 `ld' extends this limit by
   5522      grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for
   5523      its TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between
   5524      inter-group calls.  `ld' does not split apart input sections, so
   5525      cannot help if a single input file has a `.toc' section that
   5526      exceeds 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with `ld -r'.
   5527      Use this option to turn off this feature.
   5528 
   5529 
   5530 File: ld.info,  Node: SPU ELF,  Next: TI COFF,  Prev: PowerPC64 ELF64,  Up: Machine Dependent
   5531 
   5532 4.11 `ld' and SPU ELF Support
   5533 =============================
   5534 
   5535 `--plugin'
   5536      This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
   5537 
   5538 `--no-overlays'
   5539      Normally, `ld' recognizes calls to functions within overlay
   5540      regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
   5541      `ld' also provides a built-in overlay manager.  This option turns
   5542      off all this special overlay handling.
   5543 
   5544 `--emit-stub-syms'
   5545      This option causes `ld' to label overlay stubs with a local symbol
   5546      that encodes the stub type and destination.
   5547 
   5548 `--extra-overlay-stubs'
   5549      This option causes `ld' to add overlay call stubs on all function
   5550      calls out of overlay regions.  Normally stubs are not added on
   5551      calls to non-overlay regions.
   5552 
   5553 `--local-store=lo:hi'
   5554      `ld' usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in the
   5555      address range 0 to 256k.  This option may be used to change the
   5556      range.  Disable the check entirely with `--local-store=0:0'.
   5557 
   5558 `--stack-analysis'
   5559      SPU local store space is limited.  Over-allocation of stack space
   5560      unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
   5561      under-allocation results in runtime failures.  If given this
   5562      option, `ld' will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
   5563      `ld' does this by examining symbols in code sections to determine
   5564      the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues for
   5565      stack adjusting instructions.  A call-graph is created by looking
   5566      for relocations on branch instructions.  The graph is then searched
   5567      for the maximum stack usage path.  Note that this analysis does not
   5568      find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle
   5569      recursion and other cycles in the call graph.  Stack usage may be
   5570      under-estimated if your code makes such calls.  Also, stack usage
   5571      for dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected.  If a
   5572      link map is requested, detailed information about each function's
   5573      stack usage and calls will be given.
   5574 
   5575 `--emit-stack-syms'
   5576      This option, if given along with `--stack-analysis' will result in
   5577      `ld' emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.  These take
   5578      the form `__stack_<function_name>' for global functions, and
   5579      `__stack_<number>_<function_name>' for static functions.
   5580      `<number>' is the section id in hex.  The value of such symbols is
   5581      the stack requirement for the corresponding function.  The symbol
   5582      size will be zero, type `STT_NOTYPE', binding `STB_LOCAL', and
   5583      section `SHN_ABS'.
   5584 
   5585 
   5586 File: ld.info,  Node: TI COFF,  Next: WIN32,  Prev: SPU ELF,  Up: Machine Dependent
   5587 
   5588 4.12 `ld''s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
   5589 ================================================
   5590 
   5591 The `--format' switch allows selection of one of the various TI COFF
   5592 versions.  The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are also
   5593 supported.  The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order format;
   5594 `ld' will read any version or byte order, but the output header format
   5595 depends on the default specified by the specific target.
   5596 
   5597 
   5598 File: ld.info,  Node: WIN32,  Next: Xtensa,  Prev: TI COFF,  Up: Machine Dependent
   5599 
   5600 4.13 `ld' and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
   5601 ==================================
   5602 
   5603 This section describes some of the win32 specific `ld' issues.  See
   5604 *Note Command Line Options: Options. for detailed description of the
   5605 command line options mentioned here.
   5606 
   5607 _import libraries_
   5608      The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
   5609      libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's.  They
   5610      are regular static archives and are handled as any other static
   5611      archive.  The cygwin and mingw ports of `ld' have specific support
   5612      for creating such libraries provided with the `--out-implib'
   5613      command line option.
   5614 
   5615 _exporting DLL symbols_
   5616      The cygwin/mingw `ld' has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
   5617 
   5618     _using auto-export functionality_
   5619           By default `ld' exports symbols with the auto-export
   5620           functionality, which is controlled by the following command
   5621           line options:
   5622 
   5623              * -export-all-symbols   [This is the default]
   5624 
   5625              * -exclude-symbols
   5626 
   5627              * -exclude-libs
   5628 
   5629              * -exclude-modules-for-implib
   5630 
   5631              * -version-script
   5632 
   5633           When auto-export is in operation, `ld' will export all the
   5634           non-local (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with
   5635           the exception of a few symbols known to belong to the
   5636           system's runtime and libraries.  As it will often not be
   5637           desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
   5638           private functions that are not part of any public interface,
   5639           the command-line options listed above may be used to filter
   5640           symbols out from the list for exporting.  The `--output-def'
   5641           option can be used in order to see the final list of exported
   5642           symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
   5643 
   5644           If `--export-all-symbols' is not given explicitly on the
   5645           command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be
   5646           _disabled_ if either of the following are true:
   5647 
   5648              * A DEF file is used.
   5649 
   5650              * Any symbol in any object file was marked with the
   5651                __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
   5652 
   5653     _using a DEF file_
   5654           Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file.  A DEF
   5655           file is an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which
   5656           should be exported when a dll is created.  Usually it is
   5657           named `<dll name>.def' and is added as any other object file
   5658           to the linker's command line.  The file's name must end in
   5659           `.def' or `.DEF'.
   5660 
   5661                gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
   5662 
   5663           Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior,
   5664           unless the `--export-all-symbols' option is also used.
   5665 
   5666           Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called
   5667           `xyz.dll':
   5668 
   5669                LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
   5670 
   5671                EXPORTS
   5672                foo
   5673                bar
   5674                _bar = bar
   5675                another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
   5676                var1 DATA
   5677                doo = foo == foo2
   5678                eoo DATA == var1
   5679 
   5680           This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address
   5681           and seven symbols in the export table. The third exported
   5682           symbol `_bar' is an alias for the second. The fourth symbol,
   5683           `another_foo' is resolved by "forwarding" to another module
   5684           and treating it as an alias for `afoo' exported from the DLL
   5685           `abc.dll'. The final symbol `var1' is declared to be a data
   5686           object. The `doo' symbol in export library is an alias of
   5687           `foo', which gets the string name in export table `foo2'. The
   5688           `eoo' symbol is an data export symbol, which gets in export
   5689           table the name `var1'.
   5690 
   5691           The optional `LIBRARY <name>' command indicates the _internal_
   5692           name of the output DLL. If `<name>' does not include a suffix,
   5693           the default library suffix, `.DLL' is appended.
   5694 
   5695           When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather
   5696           than a library, the `NAME <name>' command should be used
   5697           instead of `LIBRARY'. If `<name>' does not include a suffix,
   5698           the default executable suffix, `.EXE' is appended.
   5699 
   5700           With either `LIBRARY <name>' or `NAME <name>' the optional
   5701           specification `BASE = <number>' may be used to specify a
   5702           non-default base address for the image.
   5703 
   5704           If neither `LIBRARY <name>' nor  `NAME <name>' is specified,
   5705           or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the
   5706           same as the filename specified on the command line.
   5707 
   5708           The complete specification of an export symbol is:
   5709 
   5710                EXPORTS
   5711                  ( (  ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
   5712                     | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
   5713                  [ @ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
   5714 
   5715           Declares `<name1>' as an exported symbol from the DLL, or
   5716           declares `<name1>' as an exported alias for `<name2>'; or
   5717           declares `<name1>' as a "forward" alias for the symbol
   5718           `<external-name>' in the DLL `<module-name>'.  Optionally,
   5719           the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
   5720           `<integer>' alias. The optional `<name3>' is the to be used
   5721           string in import/export table for the symbol.
   5722 
   5723           The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
   5724 
   5725           `NONAME': Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export
   5726           table.  It will still be exported by its ordinal alias
   5727           (either the value specified by the .def specification or,
   5728           otherwise, the value assigned by the linker). The symbol
   5729           name, however, does remain visible in the import library (if
   5730           any), unless `PRIVATE' is also specified.
   5731 
   5732           `DATA': The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a
   5733           function.  The import lib will export only an indirect
   5734           reference to `foo' as the symbol `_imp__foo' (ie, `foo' must
   5735           be resolved as `*_imp__foo').
   5736 
   5737           `CONSTANT': Like `DATA', but put the undecorated `foo' as
   5738           well as `_imp__foo' into the import library. Both refer to the
   5739           read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not
   5740           to the variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user
   5741           code fails to add the `dllimport' attribute and also fails to
   5742           explicitly add the extra indirection that the use of the
   5743           attribute enforces, the application will behave unexpectedly.
   5744 
   5745           `PRIVATE': Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do
   5746           not put it into the static import library used to resolve
   5747           imports at link time. The symbol can still be imported using
   5748           the `LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress' API at runtime or by by
   5749           using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to the DLL
   5750           without an import library.
   5751 
   5752           See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full
   5753           specification of other DEF file statements
   5754 
   5755           While linking a shared dll, `ld' is able to create a DEF file
   5756           with the `--output-def <file>' command line option.
   5757 
   5758     _Using decorations_
   5759           Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the
   5760           source code itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol
   5761           to be exported is declared as:
   5762 
   5763                __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
   5764                __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
   5765 
   5766           All such symbols will be exported from the DLL.  If, however,
   5767           any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated
   5768           in this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is
   5769           disabled, unless the `--export-all-symbols' option is also
   5770           used.
   5771 
   5772           Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must
   5773           _not_ decorate them with dllexport.  Instead, they should use
   5774           dllimport, instead:
   5775 
   5776                __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
   5777                __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
   5778 
   5779           This complicates the structure of library header files,
   5780           because when included by the library itself the header must
   5781           declare the variables and functions as dllexport, but when
   5782           included by client code the header must declare them as
   5783           dllimport.  There are a number of idioms that are typically
   5784           used to do this; often client code can omit the __declspec()
   5785           declaration completely.  See `--enable-auto-import' and
   5786           `automatic data imports' for more information.
   5787 
   5788 _automatic data imports_
   5789      The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls
   5790      only by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which
   5791      let the compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal
   5792      with this issue.  This increases the effort necessary to port
   5793      existing Un*x code to these platforms, especially for large c++
   5794      libraries and applications.  The auto-import feature, which was
   5795      initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
   5796      decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on
   5797      POSIX/Un*x platforms. This feature is enabled with the
   5798      `--enable-auto-import' command-line option, although it is enabled
   5799      by default on cygwin/mingw.  The `--enable-auto-import' option
   5800      itself now serves mainly to suppress any warnings that are
   5801      ordinarily emitted when linked objects trigger the feature's use.
   5802 
   5803      auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
   5804      additional assistance.  Sometimes, you will see this message
   5805 
   5806      "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
   5807      documentation for ld's `--enable-auto-import' for details."
   5808 
   5809      The `--enable-auto-import' documentation explains why this error
   5810      occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this
   5811      difficulty.  One of these methods is the _runtime pseudo-relocs_
   5812      feature, described below.
   5813 
   5814      For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or
   5815      classes), object files typically contain a base address for the
   5816      variable and an offset (_addend_) within the variable-to specify a
   5817      particular field or public member, for instance.  Unfortunately,
   5818      the runtime loader used in win32 environments is incapable of
   5819      fixing these references at runtime without the additional
   5820      information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.  The
   5821      standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve
   5822      these references.
   5823 
   5824      The `--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' switch allows these
   5825      references to be resolved without error, while leaving the task of
   5826      adjusting the references themselves (with their non-zero addends)
   5827      to specialized code provided by the runtime environment.  Recent
   5828      versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and compilers
   5829      provide this runtime support; older versions do not.  However, the
   5830      support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the
   5831      compiled result will run without error on an older system.
   5832 
   5833      `--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' is not the default; it must be
   5834      explicitly enabled as needed.
   5835 
   5836 _direct linking to a dll_
   5837      The cygwin/mingw ports of `ld' support the direct linking,
   5838      including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
   5839      libraries.  This is much faster and uses much less memory than
   5840      does the traditional import library method, especially when
   5841      linking large libraries or applications.  When `ld' creates an
   5842      import lib, each function or variable exported from the dll is
   5843      stored in its own bfd, even though a single bfd could contain many
   5844      exports.  The overhead involved in storing, loading, and
   5845      processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
   5846      tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against
   5847      particularly large or complex libraries when using import libs.
   5848 
   5849      Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches
   5850      other than `-L' and `-l', because `ld' already searches for a
   5851      number of names to match each library.  All that is needed from
   5852      the developer's perspective is an understanding of this search, in
   5853      order to force ld to select the dll instead of an import library.
   5854 
   5855      For instance, when ld is called with the argument `-lxxx' it will
   5856      attempt to find, in the first directory of its search path,
   5857 
   5858           libxxx.dll.a
   5859           xxx.dll.a
   5860           libxxx.a
   5861           xxx.lib
   5862           cygxxx.dll (*)
   5863           libxxx.dll
   5864           xxx.dll
   5865 
   5866      before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
   5867 
   5868      (*) Actually, this is not `cygxxx.dll' but in fact is
   5869      `<prefix>xxx.dll', where `<prefix>' is set by the `ld' option
   5870      `--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>'. In the case of cygwin, the
   5871      standard gcc spec file includes `--dll-search-prefix=cyg', so in
   5872      effect we actually search for `cygxxx.dll'.
   5873 
   5874      Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may
   5875      use other `<prefix>'es, although at present only cygwin makes use
   5876      of this feature.  It was originally intended to help avoid name
   5877      conflicts among dll's built for the various win32/un*x
   5878      environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
   5879      could coexist on the same machine.
   5880 
   5881      The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a `bin' directory for
   5882      applications and dll's and a `lib' directory for the import
   5883      libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
   5884 
   5885           bin/
   5886           	cygxxx.dll
   5887           lib/
   5888           	libxxx.dll.a   (in case of dll's)
   5889           	libxxx.a       (in case of static archive)
   5890 
   5891      Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
   5892      done two ways:
   5893 
   5894      1. Use the dll directly by adding the `bin' path to the link line
   5895           gcc -Wl,-verbose  -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
   5896 
   5897      However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their
   5898      names (`cygncurses-5.dll') this will often fail, unless one
   5899      specifies `-L../bin -lncurses-5' to include the version.  Import
   5900      libs are generally not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
   5901 
   5902      2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the `lib'
   5903      directory according to the above mentioned search pattern.  This
   5904      should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
   5905      making the app/dll.
   5906 
   5907           ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
   5908 
   5909      Then you can link without any make environment changes.
   5910 
   5911           gcc -Wl,-verbose  -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
   5912 
   5913      This technique also avoids the version number problems, because
   5914      the following is perfectly legal
   5915 
   5916           bin/
   5917           	cygxxx-5.dll
   5918           lib/
   5919           	libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
   5920 
   5921      Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
   5922      even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
   5923      `--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' is used.
   5924 
   5925      Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might
   5926      justifiably wonder why import libraries are used at all.  There
   5927      are three reasons:
   5928 
   5929      1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did _not_
   5930      work with auto-imported data.
   5931 
   5932      2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within
   5933      the import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for
   5934      indirection symbols that point to the exports of a dll).  Again,
   5935      the import lib for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability,
   5936      and it is not possible to do this without an import lib.
   5937 
   5938      3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib.  This
   5939      is critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32
   5940      API) in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases
   5941      of their stdcall-decorated assembly names.
   5942 
   5943      So, import libs are not going away.  But the ability to replace
   5944      true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of) a
   5945      dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
   5946      binutils makes available to the win32 developer.  Given the
   5947      massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
   5948      requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
   5949      will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
   5950 
   5951 _symbol aliasing_
   5952 
   5953     _adding additional names_
   5954           Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional
   5955           names.  A symbol `foo' will be exported as `foo', but it can
   5956           also be exported as `_foo' by using special directives in the
   5957           DEF file when creating the dll.  This will affect also the
   5958           optional created import library.  Consider the following DEF
   5959           file:
   5960 
   5961                LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
   5962 
   5963                EXPORTS
   5964                foo
   5965                _foo = foo
   5966 
   5967           The line `_foo = foo' maps the symbol `foo' to `_foo'.
   5968 
   5969           Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in
   5970           the source code using the "weak" attribute:
   5971 
   5972                void foo () { /* Do something.  */; }
   5973                void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
   5974 
   5975           See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and
   5976           weak symbols.
   5977 
   5978     _renaming symbols_
   5979           Sometimes it is useful to rename exports.  For instance, the
   5980           cygwin kernel does this regularly.  A symbol `_foo' can be
   5981           exported as `foo' but not as `_foo' by using special
   5982           directives in the DEF file. (This will also affect the import
   5983           library, if it is created).  In the following example:
   5984 
   5985                LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
   5986 
   5987                EXPORTS
   5988                _foo = foo
   5989 
   5990           The line `_foo = foo' maps the exported symbol `foo' to
   5991           `_foo'.
   5992 
   5993      Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
   5994      unless the `--export-all-symbols' command line option is used.
   5995      If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
   5996      _all_ desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols that
   5997      are not being renamed, and do _not_ use the `--export-all-symbols'
   5998      option.  If you list only the renamed symbols in the DEF file, and
   5999      use `--export-all-symbols' to handle the other symbols, then the
   6000      both the new names _and_ the original names for the renamed
   6001      symbols will be exported.  In effect, you'd be aliasing those
   6002      symbols, not renaming them, which is probably not what you wanted.
   6003 
   6004 _weak externals_
   6005      The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols
   6006      called weak externals.  When a weak symbol is linked and the
   6007      symbol is not defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some
   6008      other symbol.  There are three variants of weak externals:
   6009         * Definition is searched for in objects and libraries,
   6010           historically called lazy externals.
   6011 
   6012         * Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in
   6013           libraries.  This form is not presently implemented.
   6014 
   6015         * No search; the symbol is an alias.  This form is not presently
   6016           implemented.
   6017      As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate
   6018      symbol are supported.  If the symbol is undefined when linking,
   6019      the symbol uses a default value.
   6020 
   6021 _aligned common symbols_
   6022      As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to
   6023      specify the desired alignment for a common symbol.  This
   6024      information is conveyed from the assembler or compiler to the
   6025      linker by means of GNU-specific commands carried in the object
   6026      file's `.drectve' section, which are recognized by `ld' and
   6027      respected when laying out the common symbols.  Native tools will
   6028      be able to process object files employing this GNU extension, but
   6029      will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue
   6030      noisy warnings about unknown linker directives.
   6031 
   6032 
   6033 File: ld.info,  Node: Xtensa,  Prev: WIN32,  Up: Machine Dependent
   6034 
   6035 4.14 `ld' and Xtensa Processors
   6036 ===============================
   6037 
   6038 The default `ld' behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
   6039 `SECTIONS' commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
   6040 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
   6041 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets.  For
   6042 example, with the command:
   6043 
   6044      SECTIONS
   6045      {
   6046        .text : {
   6047          *(.literal .text)
   6048        }
   6049      }
   6050 
   6051 `ld' may interleave some of the `.literal' and `.text' sections from
   6052 different object files to ensure that the literal pools are within the
   6053 range of PC-relative load offsets.  A valid interleaving might place
   6054 the `.literal' sections from an initial group of files followed by the
   6055 `.text' sections of that group of files.  Then, the `.literal' sections
   6056 from the rest of the files and the `.text' sections from the rest of
   6057 the files would follow.
   6058 
   6059    Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of `ld' and
   6060 provides two important link-time optimizations.  The first optimization
   6061 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size.  A redundant
   6062 literal will be removed and all the `L32R' instructions that use it
   6063 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
   6064 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
   6065 the `L32R' instructions.  The second optimization is to remove
   6066 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated "longcall" sequences of
   6067 `L32R'/`CALLXN' when the target functions are within range of direct
   6068 `CALLN' instructions.
   6069 
   6070    For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be
   6071 optimized to a direct call, the linker will change the `CALLXN'
   6072 instruction to a `CALLN' instruction, remove the `L32R' instruction,
   6073 and remove the literal referenced by the `L32R' instruction if it is
   6074 not used for anything else.  Removing the `L32R' instruction always
   6075 reduces code size but can potentially hurt performance by changing the
   6076 alignment of subsequent branch targets.  By default, the linker will
   6077 always preserve alignments, either by switching some instructions
   6078 between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent density instructions or by
   6079 inserting a no-op in place of the `L32R' instruction that was removed.
   6080 If code size is more important than performance, the `--size-opt'
   6081 option can be used to prevent the linker from widening density
   6082 instructions or inserting no-ops, except in a few cases where no-ops
   6083 are required for correctness.
   6084 
   6085    The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
   6086 control the linker:
   6087 
   6088 `--size-opt'
   6089      When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code
   6090      size more than performance.  With this option, the linker will not
   6091      insert no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch
   6092      target alignment.  There may still be some cases where no-ops are
   6093      required to preserve the correctness of the code.
   6094 
   6095 
   6096 File: ld.info,  Node: BFD,  Next: Reporting Bugs,  Prev: Machine Dependent,  Up: Top
   6097 
   6098 5 BFD
   6099 *****
   6100 
   6101 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
   6102 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
   6103 object files whatever the object file format.  A different object file
   6104 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
   6105 it to the library.  To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
   6106 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
   6107 object file formats available.  You can use `objdump -i' (*note
   6108 objdump: (binutils.info)objdump.) to list all the formats available for
   6109 your configuration.
   6110 
   6111    As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between several
   6112 conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing BFD design was
   6113 efficiency: any time used converting between formats is time which
   6114 would not have been spent had BFD not been involved. This is partly
   6115 offset by abstraction payback; since BFD simplifies applications and
   6116 back ends, more time and care may be spent optimizing algorithms for a
   6117 greater speed.
   6118 
   6119    One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in mind
   6120 is the potential for information loss.  There are two places where
   6121 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
   6122 conversion and during output. *Note BFD information loss::.
   6123 
   6124 * Menu:
   6125 
   6126 * BFD outline::                 How it works: an outline of BFD
   6127 
   6128 
   6129 File: ld.info,  Node: BFD outline,  Up: BFD
   6130 
   6131 5.1 How It Works: An Outline of BFD
   6132 ===================================
   6133 
   6134 When an object file is opened, BFD subroutines automatically determine
   6135 the format of the input object file.  They then build a descriptor in
   6136 memory with pointers to routines that will be used to access elements of
   6137 the object file's data structures.
   6138 
   6139    As different information from the object files is required, BFD
   6140 reads from different sections of the file and processes them.  For
   6141 example, a very common operation for the linker is processing symbol
   6142 tables.  Each BFD back end provides a routine for converting between
   6143 the object file's representation of symbols and an internal canonical
   6144 format. When the linker asks for the symbol table of an object file, it
   6145 calls through a memory pointer to the routine from the relevant BFD
   6146 back end which reads and converts the table into a canonical form.  The
   6147 linker then operates upon the canonical form. When the link is finished
   6148 and the linker writes the output file's symbol table, another BFD back
   6149 end routine is called to take the newly created symbol table and
   6150 convert it into the chosen output format.
   6151 
   6152 * Menu:
   6153 
   6154 * BFD information loss::	Information Loss
   6155 * Canonical format::		The BFD	canonical object-file format
   6156 
   6157 
   6158 File: ld.info,  Node: BFD information loss,  Next: Canonical format,  Up: BFD outline
   6159 
   6160 5.1.1 Information Loss
   6161 ----------------------
   6162 
   6163 _Information can be lost during output._ The output formats supported
   6164 by BFD do not provide identical facilities, and information which can
   6165 be described in one form has nowhere to go in another format. One
   6166 example of this is alignment information in `b.out'. There is nowhere
   6167 in an `a.out' format file to store alignment information on the
   6168 contained data, so when a file is linked from `b.out' and an `a.out'
   6169 image is produced, alignment information will not propagate to the
   6170 output file. (The linker will still use the alignment information
   6171 internally, so the link is performed correctly).
   6172 
   6173    Another example is COFF section names. COFF files may contain an
   6174 unlimited number of sections, each one with a textual section name. If
   6175 the target of the link is a format which does not have many sections
   6176 (e.g., `a.out') or has sections without names (e.g., the Oasys format),
   6177 the link cannot be done simply. You can circumvent this problem by
   6178 describing the desired input-to-output section mapping with the linker
   6179 command language.
   6180 
   6181    _Information can be lost during canonicalization._ The BFD internal
   6182 canonical form of the external formats is not exhaustive; there are
   6183 structures in input formats for which there is no direct representation
   6184 internally.  This means that the BFD back ends cannot maintain all
   6185 possible data richness through the transformation between external to
   6186 internal and back to external formats.
   6187 
   6188    This limitation is only a problem when an application reads one
   6189 format and writes another.  Each BFD back end is responsible for
   6190 maintaining as much data as possible, and the internal BFD canonical
   6191 form has structures which are opaque to the BFD core, and exported only
   6192 to the back ends. When a file is read in one format, the canonical form
   6193 is generated for BFD and the application. At the same time, the back
   6194 end saves away any information which may otherwise be lost. If the data
   6195 is then written back in the same format, the back end routine will be
   6196 able to use the canonical form provided by the BFD core as well as the
   6197 information it prepared earlier.  Since there is a great deal of
   6198 commonality between back ends, there is no information lost when
   6199 linking or copying big endian COFF to little endian COFF, or `a.out' to
   6200 `b.out'.  When a mixture of formats is linked, the information is only
   6201 lost from the files whose format differs from the destination.
   6202 
   6203 
   6204 File: ld.info,  Node: Canonical format,  Prev: BFD information loss,  Up: BFD outline
   6205 
   6206 5.1.2 The BFD canonical object-file format
   6207 ------------------------------------------
   6208 
   6209 The greatest potential for loss of information occurs when there is the
   6210 least overlap between the information provided by the source format,
   6211 that stored by the canonical format, and that needed by the destination
   6212 format. A brief description of the canonical form may help you
   6213 understand which kinds of data you can count on preserving across
   6214 conversions.  
   6215 
   6216 _files_
   6217      Information stored on a per-file basis includes target machine
   6218      architecture, particular implementation format type, a demand
   6219      pageable bit, and a write protected bit.  Information like Unix
   6220      magic numbers is not stored here--only the magic numbers' meaning,
   6221      so a `ZMAGIC' file would have both the demand pageable bit and the
   6222      write protected text bit set.  The byte order of the target is
   6223      stored on a per-file basis, so that big- and little-endian object
   6224      files may be used with one another.
   6225 
   6226 _sections_
   6227      Each section in the input file contains the name of the section,
   6228      the section's original address in the object file, size and
   6229      alignment information, various flags, and pointers into other BFD
   6230      data structures.
   6231 
   6232 _symbols_
   6233      Each symbol contains a pointer to the information for the object
   6234      file which originally defined it, its name, its value, and various
   6235      flag bits.  When a BFD back end reads in a symbol table, it
   6236      relocates all symbols to make them relative to the base of the
   6237      section where they were defined.  Doing this ensures that each
   6238      symbol points to its containing section.  Each symbol also has a
   6239      varying amount of hidden private data for the BFD back end.  Since
   6240      the symbol points to the original file, the private data format
   6241      for that symbol is accessible.  `ld' can operate on a collection
   6242      of symbols of wildly different formats without problems.
   6243 
   6244      Normal global and simple local symbols are maintained on output,
   6245      so an output file (no matter its format) will retain symbols
   6246      pointing to functions and to global, static, and common variables.
   6247      Some symbol information is not worth retaining; in `a.out', type
   6248      information is stored in the symbol table as long symbol names.
   6249      This information would be useless to most COFF debuggers; the
   6250      linker has command line switches to allow users to throw it away.
   6251 
   6252      There is one word of type information within the symbol, so if the
   6253      format supports symbol type information within symbols (for
   6254      example, COFF, IEEE, Oasys) and the type is simple enough to fit
   6255      within one word (nearly everything but aggregates), the
   6256      information will be preserved.
   6257 
   6258 _relocation level_
   6259      Each canonical BFD relocation record contains a pointer to the
   6260      symbol to relocate to, the offset of the data to relocate, the
   6261      section the data is in, and a pointer to a relocation type
   6262      descriptor. Relocation is performed by passing messages through
   6263      the relocation type descriptor and the symbol pointer. Therefore,
   6264      relocations can be performed on output data using a relocation
   6265      method that is only available in one of the input formats. For
   6266      instance, Oasys provides a byte relocation format.  A relocation
   6267      record requesting this relocation type would point indirectly to a
   6268      routine to perform this, so the relocation may be performed on a
   6269      byte being written to a 68k COFF file, even though 68k COFF has no
   6270      such relocation type.
   6271 
   6272 _line numbers_
   6273      Object formats can contain, for debugging purposes, some form of
   6274      mapping between symbols, source line numbers, and addresses in the
   6275      output file.  These addresses have to be relocated along with the
   6276      symbol information.  Each symbol with an associated list of line
   6277      number records points to the first record of the list.  The head
   6278      of a line number list consists of a pointer to the symbol, which
   6279      allows finding out the address of the function whose line number
   6280      is being described. The rest of the list is made up of pairs:
   6281      offsets into the section and line numbers. Any format which can
   6282      simply derive this information can pass it successfully between
   6283      formats (COFF, IEEE and Oasys).
   6284 
   6285 
   6286 File: ld.info,  Node: Reporting Bugs,  Next: MRI,  Prev: BFD,  Up: Top
   6287 
   6288 6 Reporting Bugs
   6289 ****************
   6290 
   6291 Your bug reports play an essential role in making `ld' reliable.
   6292 
   6293    Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem,
   6294 or it may not.  But in any case the principal function of a bug report
   6295 is to help the entire community by making the next version of `ld' work
   6296 better.  Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of `ld'.
   6297 
   6298    In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
   6299 information that enables us to fix the bug.
   6300 
   6301 * Menu:
   6302 
   6303 * Bug Criteria::                Have you found a bug?
   6304 * Bug Reporting::               How to report bugs
   6305 
   6306 
   6307 File: ld.info,  Node: Bug Criteria,  Next: Bug Reporting,  Up: Reporting Bugs
   6308 
   6309 6.1 Have You Found a Bug?
   6310 =========================
   6311 
   6312 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some
   6313 guidelines:
   6314 
   6315    * If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is
   6316      a `ld' bug.  Reliable linkers never crash.
   6317 
   6318    * If `ld' produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
   6319 
   6320    * If `ld' does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
   6321      may be a bug.  In the general case, the linker can not verify that
   6322      object files are correct.
   6323 
   6324    * If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
   6325      improvement of `ld' are welcome in any case.
   6326 
   6327 
   6328 File: ld.info,  Node: Bug Reporting,  Prev: Bug Criteria,  Up: Reporting Bugs
   6329 
   6330 6.2 How to Report Bugs
   6331 ======================
   6332 
   6333 A number of companies and individuals offer support for GNU products.
   6334 If you obtained `ld' from a support organization, we recommend you
   6335 contact that organization first.
   6336 
   6337    You can find contact information for many support companies and
   6338 individuals in the file `etc/SERVICE' in the GNU Emacs distribution.
   6339 
   6340    Otherwise, send bug reports for `ld' to
   6341 `http://www.sourceware.org/bugzilla/'.
   6342 
   6343    The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
   6344 *report all the facts*.  If you are not sure whether to state a fact or
   6345 leave it out, state it!
   6346 
   6347    Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
   6348 problem and assume that some details do not matter.  Thus, you might
   6349 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter.
   6350 Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure.  Perhaps the bug
   6351 is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the location
   6352 where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name were
   6353 different, the contents of that location would fool the linker into
   6354 doing the right thing despite the bug.  Play it safe and give a
   6355 specific, complete example.  That is the easiest thing for you to do,
   6356 and the most helpful.
   6357 
   6358    Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
   6359 the bug if it is new to us.  Therefore, always write your bug reports
   6360 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
   6361 
   6362    Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, "Does this ring a
   6363 bell?"  This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless.  We
   6364 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.  You
   6365 might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
   6366 
   6367    To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
   6368 
   6369    * The version of `ld'.  `ld' announces it if you start it with the
   6370      `--version' argument.
   6371 
   6372      Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in
   6373      looking for the bug in the current version of `ld'.
   6374 
   6375    * Any patches you may have applied to the `ld' source, including any
   6376      patches made to the `BFD' library.
   6377 
   6378    * The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name
   6379      and version number.
   6380 
   6381    * What compiler (and its version) was used to compile `ld'--e.g.
   6382      "`gcc-2.7'".
   6383 
   6384    * The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
   6385      observe the bug.  To guarantee you will not omit something
   6386      important, list them all.  A copy of the Makefile (or the output
   6387      from make) is sufficient.
   6388 
   6389      If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess
   6390      wrong and then we might not encounter the bug.
   6391 
   6392    * A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce
   6393      the bug.  It is generally most helpful to send the actual object
   6394      files provided that they are reasonably small.  Say no more than
   6395      10K.  For bigger files you can either make them available by FTP
   6396      or HTTP or else state that you are willing to send the object
   6397      file(s) to whomever requests them.  (Note - your email will be
   6398      going to a mailing list, so we do not want to clog it up with
   6399      large attachments).  But small attachments are best.
   6400 
   6401      If the source files were assembled using `gas' or compiled using
   6402      `gcc', then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
   6403      object files.  In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
   6404      `gas' or `gcc' was used to produce the object files.  Also say how
   6405      `gas' or `gcc' were configured.
   6406 
   6407    * A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
   6408      incorrect.  For example, "It gets a fatal signal."
   6409 
   6410      Of course, if the bug is that `ld' gets a fatal signal, then we
   6411      will certainly notice it.  But if the bug is incorrect output, we
   6412      might not notice unless it is glaringly wrong.  You might as well
   6413      not give us a chance to make a mistake.
   6414 
   6415      Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should
   6416      still say so explicitly.  Suppose something strange is going on,
   6417      such as, your copy of `ld' is out of sync, or you have encountered
   6418      a bug in the C library on your system.  (This has happened!)  Your
   6419      copy might crash and ours would not.  If you told us to expect a
   6420      crash, then when ours fails to crash, we would know that the bug
   6421      was not happening for us.  If you had not told us to expect a
   6422      crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
   6423      observations.
   6424 
   6425    * If you wish to suggest changes to the `ld' source, send us context
   6426      diffs, as generated by `diff' with the `-u', `-c', or `-p' option.
   6427      Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.  If you even
   6428      discuss something in the `ld' source, refer to it by context, not
   6429      by line number.
   6430 
   6431      The line numbers in our development sources will not match those
   6432      in your sources.  Your line numbers would convey no useful
   6433      information to us.
   6434 
   6435    Here are some things that are not necessary:
   6436 
   6437    * A description of the envelope of the bug.
   6438 
   6439      Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
   6440      which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
   6441      changes will not affect it.
   6442 
   6443      This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way
   6444      we will find the bug is by running a single example under the
   6445      debugger with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of
   6446      examples.  We recommend that you save your time for something else.
   6447 
   6448      Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report _instead_
   6449      of the original one, that is a convenience for us.  Errors in the
   6450      output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
   6451      less time, and so on.
   6452 
   6453      However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do
   6454      this, report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you
   6455      used.
   6456 
   6457    * A patch for the bug.
   6458 
   6459      A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one.  But do not
   6460      omit the necessary information, such as the test case, on the
   6461      assumption that a patch is all we need.  We might see problems
   6462      with your patch and decide to fix the problem another way, or we
   6463      might not understand it at all.
   6464 
   6465      Sometimes with a program as complicated as `ld' it is very hard to
   6466      construct an example that will make the program follow a certain
   6467      path through the code.  If you do not send us the example, we will
   6468      not be able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify
   6469      that the bug is fixed.
   6470 
   6471      And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why
   6472      your patch should be an improvement, we will not install it.  A
   6473      test case will help us to understand.
   6474 
   6475    * A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
   6476 
   6477      Such guesses are usually wrong.  Even we cannot guess right about
   6478      such things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
   6479 
   6480 
   6481 File: ld.info,  Node: MRI,  Next: GNU Free Documentation License,  Prev: Reporting Bugs,  Up: Top
   6482 
   6483 Appendix A MRI Compatible Script Files
   6484 **************************************
   6485 
   6486 To aid users making the transition to GNU `ld' from the MRI linker,
   6487 `ld' can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an alternative to the
   6488 more general-purpose linker scripting language described in *Note
   6489 Scripts::.  MRI compatible linker scripts have a much simpler command
   6490 set than the scripting language otherwise used with `ld'.  GNU `ld'
   6491 supports the most commonly used MRI linker commands; these commands are
   6492 described here.
   6493 
   6494    In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the `a.out' object
   6495 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
   6496 features to make use of them.
   6497 
   6498    You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
   6499 `-c' command-line option.
   6500 
   6501    Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
   6502 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
   6503 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation).  If a line of an
   6504 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, `ld' issues
   6505 a warning message, but continues processing the script.
   6506 
   6507    Lines beginning with `*' are comments.
   6508 
   6509    You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
   6510 lower case; for example, `chip' is the same as `CHIP'.  The following
   6511 list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
   6512 
   6513 `ABSOLUTE SECNAME'
   6514 `ABSOLUTE SECNAME, SECNAME, ... SECNAME'
   6515      Normally, `ld' includes in the output file all sections from all
   6516      the input files.  However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can
   6517      use the `ABSOLUTE' command to restrict the sections that will be
   6518      present in your output program.  If the `ABSOLUTE' command is used
   6519      at all in a script, then only the sections named explicitly in
   6520      `ABSOLUTE' commands will appear in the linker output.  You can
   6521      still use other input sections (whatever you select on the command
   6522      line, or using `LOAD') to resolve addresses in the output file.
   6523 
   6524 `ALIAS OUT-SECNAME, IN-SECNAME'
   6525      Use this command to place the data from input section IN-SECNAME
   6526      in a section called OUT-SECNAME in the linker output file.
   6527 
   6528      IN-SECNAME may be an integer.
   6529 
   6530 `ALIGN SECNAME = EXPRESSION'
   6531      Align the section called SECNAME to EXPRESSION.  The EXPRESSION
   6532      should be a power of two.
   6533 
   6534 `BASE EXPRESSION'
   6535      Use the value of EXPRESSION as the lowest address (other than
   6536      absolute addresses) in the output file.
   6537 
   6538 `CHIP EXPRESSION'
   6539 `CHIP EXPRESSION, EXPRESSION'
   6540      This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
   6541 
   6542 `END'
   6543      This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for
   6544      compatibility.
   6545 
   6546 `FORMAT OUTPUT-FORMAT'
   6547      Similar to the `OUTPUT_FORMAT' command in the more general linker
   6548      language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
   6549 
   6550        1. S-records, if OUTPUT-FORMAT is `S'
   6551 
   6552        2. IEEE, if OUTPUT-FORMAT is `IEEE'
   6553 
   6554        3. COFF (the `coff-m68k' variant in BFD), if OUTPUT-FORMAT is
   6555           `COFF'
   6556 
   6557 `LIST ANYTHING...'
   6558      Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
   6559      `ld' command-line option `-M'.
   6560 
   6561      The keyword `LIST' may be followed by anything on the same line,
   6562      with no change in its effect.
   6563 
   6564 `LOAD FILENAME'
   6565 `LOAD FILENAME, FILENAME, ... FILENAME'
   6566      Include one or more object file FILENAME in the link; this has the
   6567      same effect as specifying FILENAME directly on the `ld' command
   6568      line.
   6569 
   6570 `NAME OUTPUT-NAME'
   6571      OUTPUT-NAME is the name for the program produced by `ld'; the
   6572      MRI-compatible command `NAME' is equivalent to the command-line
   6573      option `-o' or the general script language command `OUTPUT'.
   6574 
   6575 `ORDER SECNAME, SECNAME, ... SECNAME'
   6576 `ORDER SECNAME SECNAME SECNAME'
   6577      Normally, `ld' orders the sections in its output file in the order
   6578      in which they first appear in the input files.  In an
   6579      MRI-compatible script, you can override this ordering with the
   6580      `ORDER' command.  The sections you list with `ORDER' will appear
   6581      first in your output file, in the order specified.
   6582 
   6583 `PUBLIC NAME=EXPRESSION'
   6584 `PUBLIC NAME,EXPRESSION'
   6585 `PUBLIC NAME EXPRESSION'
   6586      Supply a value (EXPRESSION) for external symbol NAME used in the
   6587      linker input files.
   6588 
   6589 `SECT SECNAME, EXPRESSION'
   6590 `SECT SECNAME=EXPRESSION'
   6591 `SECT SECNAME EXPRESSION'
   6592      You can use any of these three forms of the `SECT' command to
   6593      specify the start address (EXPRESSION) for section SECNAME.  If
   6594      you have more than one `SECT' statement for the same SECNAME, only
   6595      the _first_ sets the start address.
   6596 
   6597 
   6598 File: ld.info,  Node: GNU Free Documentation License,  Next: LD Index,  Prev: MRI,  Up: Top
   6599 
   6600 Appendix B GNU Free Documentation License
   6601 *****************************************
   6602 
   6603                      Version 1.3, 3 November 2008
   6604 
   6605      Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
   6606      `http://fsf.org/'
   6607 
   6608      Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
   6609      of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
   6610 
   6611   0. PREAMBLE
   6612 
   6613      The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
   6614      functional and useful document "free" in the sense of freedom: to
   6615      assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it,
   6616      with or without modifying it, either commercially or
   6617      noncommercially.  Secondarily, this License preserves for the
   6618      author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not
   6619      being considered responsible for modifications made by others.
   6620 
   6621      This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative
   6622      works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense.
   6623      It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
   6624      license designed for free software.
   6625 
   6626      We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for
   6627      free software, because free software needs free documentation: a
   6628      free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms
   6629      that the software does.  But this License is not limited to
   6630      software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless
   6631      of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book.
   6632      We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is
   6633      instruction or reference.
   6634 
   6635   1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS
   6636 
   6637      This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium,
   6638      that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it
   6639      can be distributed under the terms of this License.  Such a notice
   6640      grants a world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration,
   6641      to use that work under the conditions stated herein.  The
   6642      "Document", below, refers to any such manual or work.  Any member
   6643      of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as "you".  You
   6644      accept the license if you copy, modify or distribute the work in a
   6645      way requiring permission under copyright law.
   6646 
   6647      A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the
   6648      Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
   6649      modifications and/or translated into another language.
   6650 
   6651      A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter section
   6652      of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
   6653      publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall
   6654      subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could
   6655      fall directly within that overall subject.  (Thus, if the Document
   6656      is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not
   6657      explain any mathematics.)  The relationship could be a matter of
   6658      historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or
   6659      of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position
   6660      regarding them.
   6661 
   6662      The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose
   6663      titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in
   6664      the notice that says that the Document is released under this
   6665      License.  If a section does not fit the above definition of
   6666      Secondary then it is not allowed to be designated as Invariant.
   6667      The Document may contain zero Invariant Sections.  If the Document
   6668      does not identify any Invariant Sections then there are none.
   6669 
   6670      The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are
   6671      listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice
   6672      that says that the Document is released under this License.  A
   6673      Front-Cover Text may be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may
   6674      be at most 25 words.
   6675 
   6676      A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
   6677      represented in a format whose specification is available to the
   6678      general public, that is suitable for revising the document
   6679      straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images
   6680      composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some
   6681      widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to
   6682      text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of
   6683      formats suitable for input to text formatters.  A copy made in an
   6684      otherwise Transparent file format whose markup, or absence of
   6685      markup, has been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent
   6686      modification by readers is not Transparent.  An image format is
   6687      not Transparent if used for any substantial amount of text.  A
   6688      copy that is not "Transparent" is called "Opaque".
   6689 
   6690      Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
   6691      ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format,
   6692      SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and
   6693      standard-conforming simple HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for
   6694      human modification.  Examples of transparent image formats include
   6695      PNG, XCF and JPG.  Opaque formats include proprietary formats that
   6696      can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or
   6697      XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally
   6698      available, and the machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF
   6699      produced by some word processors for output purposes only.
   6700 
   6701      The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
   6702      plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the
   6703      material this License requires to appear in the title page.  For
   6704      works in formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title
   6705      Page" means the text near the most prominent appearance of the
   6706      work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
   6707 
   6708      The "publisher" means any person or entity that distributes copies
   6709      of the Document to the public.
   6710 
   6711      A section "Entitled XYZ" means a named subunit of the Document
   6712      whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses
   6713      following text that translates XYZ in another language.  (Here XYZ
   6714      stands for a specific section name mentioned below, such as
   6715      "Acknowledgements", "Dedications", "Endorsements", or "History".)
   6716      To "Preserve the Title" of such a section when you modify the
   6717      Document means that it remains a section "Entitled XYZ" according
   6718      to this definition.
   6719 
   6720      The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice
   6721      which states that this License applies to the Document.  These
   6722      Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in
   6723      this License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other
   6724      implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and
   6725      has no effect on the meaning of this License.
   6726 
   6727   2. VERBATIM COPYING
   6728 
   6729      You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
   6730      commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
   6731      copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License
   6732      applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you
   6733      add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License.  You
   6734      may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading
   6735      or further copying of the copies you make or distribute.  However,
   6736      you may accept compensation in exchange for copies.  If you
   6737      distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow
   6738      the conditions in section 3.
   6739 
   6740      You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above,
   6741      and you may publicly display copies.
   6742 
   6743   3. COPYING IN QUANTITY
   6744 
   6745      If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly
   6746      have printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and
   6747      the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must
   6748      enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all
   6749      these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and
   6750      Back-Cover Texts on the back cover.  Both covers must also clearly
   6751      and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies.  The
   6752      front cover must present the full title with all words of the
   6753      title equally prominent and visible.  You may add other material
   6754      on the covers in addition.  Copying with changes limited to the
   6755      covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and
   6756      satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in
   6757      other respects.
   6758 
   6759      If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
   6760      legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
   6761      reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto
   6762      adjacent pages.
   6763 
   6764      If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document
   6765      numbering more than 100, you must either include a
   6766      machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or
   6767      state in or with each Opaque copy a computer-network location from
   6768      which the general network-using public has access to download
   6769      using public-standard network protocols a complete Transparent
   6770      copy of the Document, free of added material.  If you use the
   6771      latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you
   6772      begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that
   6773      this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated
   6774      location until at least one year after the last time you
   6775      distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or
   6776      retailers) of that edition to the public.
   6777 
   6778      It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of
   6779      the Document well before redistributing any large number of
   6780      copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated
   6781      version of the Document.
   6782 
   6783   4. MODIFICATIONS
   6784 
   6785      You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document
   6786      under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you
   6787      release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with
   6788      the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus
   6789      licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to
   6790      whoever possesses a copy of it.  In addition, you must do these
   6791      things in the Modified Version:
   6792 
   6793        A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title
   6794           distinct from that of the Document, and from those of
   6795           previous versions (which should, if there were any, be listed
   6796           in the History section of the Document).  You may use the
   6797           same title as a previous version if the original publisher of
   6798           that version gives permission.
   6799 
   6800        B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or
   6801           entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in
   6802           the Modified Version, together with at least five of the
   6803           principal authors of the Document (all of its principal
   6804           authors, if it has fewer than five), unless they release you
   6805           from this requirement.
   6806 
   6807        C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
   6808           Modified Version, as the publisher.
   6809 
   6810        D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
   6811 
   6812        E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
   6813           adjacent to the other copyright notices.
   6814 
   6815        F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license
   6816           notice giving the public permission to use the Modified
   6817           Version under the terms of this License, in the form shown in
   6818           the Addendum below.
   6819 
   6820        G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant
   6821           Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document's
   6822           license notice.
   6823 
   6824        H. Include an unaltered copy of this License.
   6825 
   6826        I. Preserve the section Entitled "History", Preserve its Title,
   6827           and add to it an item stating at least the title, year, new
   6828           authors, and publisher of the Modified Version as given on
   6829           the Title Page.  If there is no section Entitled "History" in
   6830           the Document, create one stating the title, year, authors,
   6831           and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page,
   6832           then add an item describing the Modified Version as stated in
   6833           the previous sentence.
   6834 
   6835        J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document
   6836           for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and
   6837           likewise the network locations given in the Document for
   6838           previous versions it was based on.  These may be placed in
   6839           the "History" section.  You may omit a network location for a
   6840           work that was published at least four years before the
   6841           Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version
   6842           it refers to gives permission.
   6843 
   6844        K. For any section Entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications",
   6845           Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the
   6846           section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor
   6847           acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein.
   6848 
   6849        L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document,
   6850           unaltered in their text and in their titles.  Section numbers
   6851           or the equivalent are not considered part of the section
   6852           titles.
   6853 
   6854        M. Delete any section Entitled "Endorsements".  Such a section
   6855           may not be included in the Modified Version.
   6856 
   6857        N. Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled
   6858           "Endorsements" or to conflict in title with any Invariant
   6859           Section.
   6860 
   6861        O. Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.
   6862 
   6863      If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
   6864      appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no
   6865      material copied from the Document, you may at your option
   6866      designate some or all of these sections as invariant.  To do this,
   6867      add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified
   6868      Version's license notice.  These titles must be distinct from any
   6869      other section titles.
   6870 
   6871      You may add a section Entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains
   6872      nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
   6873      parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text
   6874      has been approved by an organization as the authoritative
   6875      definition of a standard.
   6876 
   6877      You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text,
   6878      and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end
   6879      of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version.  Only one
   6880      passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be
   6881      added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity.  If the
   6882      Document already includes a cover text for the same cover,
   6883      previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity
   6884      you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may
   6885      replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous
   6886      publisher that added the old one.
   6887 
   6888      The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this
   6889      License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to
   6890      assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
   6891 
   6892   5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS
   6893 
   6894      You may combine the Document with other documents released under
   6895      this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for
   6896      modified versions, provided that you include in the combination
   6897      all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents,
   6898      unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your
   6899      combined work in its license notice, and that you preserve all
   6900      their Warranty Disclaimers.
   6901 
   6902      The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
   6903      multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
   6904      copy.  If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name
   6905      but different contents, make the title of each such section unique
   6906      by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the
   6907      original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a
   6908      unique number.  Make the same adjustment to the section titles in
   6909      the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the
   6910      combined work.
   6911 
   6912      In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled
   6913      "History" in the various original documents, forming one section
   6914      Entitled "History"; likewise combine any sections Entitled
   6915      "Acknowledgements", and any sections Entitled "Dedications".  You
   6916      must delete all sections Entitled "Endorsements."
   6917 
   6918   6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
   6919 
   6920      You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other
   6921      documents released under this License, and replace the individual
   6922      copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy
   6923      that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the
   6924      rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the
   6925      documents in all other respects.
   6926 
   6927      You may extract a single document from such a collection, and
   6928      distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert
   6929      a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow
   6930      this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of
   6931      that document.
   6932 
   6933   7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS
   6934 
   6935      A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other
   6936      separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of
   6937      a storage or distribution medium, is called an "aggregate" if the
   6938      copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the
   6939      legal rights of the compilation's users beyond what the individual
   6940      works permit.  When the Document is included in an aggregate, this
   6941      License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which
   6942      are not themselves derivative works of the Document.
   6943 
   6944      If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
   6945      copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half
   6946      of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed
   6947      on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the
   6948      electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic
   6949      form.  Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket
   6950      the whole aggregate.
   6951 
   6952   8. TRANSLATION
   6953 
   6954      Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
   6955      distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section
   6956      4.  Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
   6957      permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
   6958      translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
   6959      original versions of these Invariant Sections.  You may include a
   6960      translation of this License, and all the license notices in the
   6961      Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also
   6962      include the original English version of this License and the
   6963      original versions of those notices and disclaimers.  In case of a
   6964      disagreement between the translation and the original version of
   6965      this License or a notice or disclaimer, the original version will
   6966      prevail.
   6967 
   6968      If a section in the Document is Entitled "Acknowledgements",
   6969      "Dedications", or "History", the requirement (section 4) to
   6970      Preserve its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the
   6971      actual title.
   6972 
   6973   9. TERMINATION
   6974 
   6975      You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document
   6976      except as expressly provided under this License.  Any attempt
   6977      otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute it is void,
   6978      and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
   6979 
   6980      However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your
   6981      license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a)
   6982      provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly
   6983      and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the
   6984      copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some
   6985      reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.
   6986 
   6987      Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is
   6988      reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the
   6989      violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have
   6990      received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from
   6991      that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days
   6992      after your receipt of the notice.
   6993 
   6994      Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate
   6995      the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from
   6996      you under this License.  If your rights have been terminated and
   6997      not permanently reinstated, receipt of a copy of some or all of
   6998      the same material does not give you any rights to use it.
   6999 
   7000  10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE
   7001 
   7002      The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of
   7003      the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time.  Such new
   7004      versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
   7005      differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.  See
   7006      `http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/'.
   7007 
   7008      Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version
   7009      number.  If the Document specifies that a particular numbered
   7010      version of this License "or any later version" applies to it, you
   7011      have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
   7012      that specified version or of any later version that has been
   7013      published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.  If
   7014      the Document does not specify a version number of this License,
   7015      you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the
   7016      Free Software Foundation.  If the Document specifies that a proxy
   7017      can decide which future versions of this License can be used, that
   7018      proxy's public statement of acceptance of a version permanently
   7019      authorizes you to choose that version for the Document.
   7020 
   7021  11. RELICENSING
   7022 
   7023      "Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site" (or "MMC Site") means any
   7024      World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also
   7025      provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works.  A
   7026      public wiki that anybody can edit is an example of such a server.
   7027      A "Massive Multiauthor Collaboration" (or "MMC") contained in the
   7028      site means any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC
   7029      site.
   7030 
   7031      "CC-BY-SA" means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0
   7032      license published by Creative Commons Corporation, a not-for-profit
   7033      corporation with a principal place of business in San Francisco,
   7034      California, as well as future copyleft versions of that license
   7035      published by that same organization.
   7036 
   7037      "Incorporate" means to publish or republish a Document, in whole or
   7038      in part, as part of another Document.
   7039 
   7040      An MMC is "eligible for relicensing" if it is licensed under this
   7041      License, and if all works that were first published under this
   7042      License somewhere other than this MMC, and subsequently
   7043      incorporated in whole or in part into the MMC, (1) had no cover
   7044      texts or invariant sections, and (2) were thus incorporated prior
   7045      to November 1, 2008.
   7046 
   7047      The operator of an MMC Site may republish an MMC contained in the
   7048      site under CC-BY-SA on the same site at any time before August 1,
   7049      2009, provided the MMC is eligible for relicensing.
   7050 
   7051 
   7052 ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
   7053 ====================================================
   7054 
   7055 To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
   7056 the License in the document and put the following copyright and license
   7057 notices just after the title page:
   7058 
   7059        Copyright (C)  YEAR  YOUR NAME.
   7060        Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
   7061        under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
   7062        or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
   7063        with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover
   7064        Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
   7065        Free Documentation License''.
   7066 
   7067    If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover
   7068 Texts, replace the "with...Texts." line with this:
   7069 
   7070          with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with
   7071          the Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts
   7072          being LIST.
   7073 
   7074    If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other
   7075 combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the
   7076 situation.
   7077 
   7078    If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
   7079 recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of
   7080 free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to
   7081 permit their use in free software.
   7082 
   7083 
   7084 File: ld.info,  Node: LD Index,  Prev: GNU Free Documentation License,  Up: Top
   7085 
   7086 LD Index
   7087 ********
   7088 
   7089 [index]
   7090 * Menu:
   7091 
   7092 * ":                                     Symbols.            (line    6)
   7093 * -(:                                    Options.            (line  696)
   7094 * --accept-unknown-input-arch:           Options.            (line  714)
   7095 * --add-needed:                          Options.            (line  738)
   7096 * --add-stdcall-alias:                   Options.            (line 1583)
   7097 * --allow-multiple-definition:           Options.            (line  989)
   7098 * --allow-shlib-undefined:               Options.            (line  995)
   7099 * --architecture=ARCH:                   Options.            (line  123)
   7100 * --as-needed:                           Options.            (line  724)
   7101 * --audit AUDITLIB:                      Options.            (line  112)
   7102 * --auxiliary=NAME:                      Options.            (line  255)
   7103 * --bank-window:                         Options.            (line 2015)
   7104 * --base-file:                           Options.            (line 1588)
   7105 * --be8:                                 ARM.                (line   28)
   7106 * --bss-plt:                             PowerPC ELF32.      (line   16)
   7107 * --build-id:                            Options.            (line 1545)
   7108 * --build-id=STYLE:                      Options.            (line 1545)
   7109 * --check-sections:                      Options.            (line  817)
   7110 * --copy-dt-needed-entries:              Options.            (line  829)
   7111 * --cref:                                Options.            (line  849)
   7112 * --default-imported-symver:             Options.            (line 1032)
   7113 * --default-script=SCRIPT:               Options.            (line  541)
   7114 * --default-symver:                      Options.            (line 1028)
   7115 * --defsym=SYMBOL=EXP:                   Options.            (line  877)
   7116 * --demangle[=STYLE]:                    Options.            (line  890)
   7117 * --depaudit AUDITLIB:                   Options.            (line  177)
   7118 * --disable-auto-image-base:             Options.            (line 1767)
   7119 * --disable-auto-import:                 Options.            (line 1902)
   7120 * --disable-long-section-names:          Options.            (line 1598)
   7121 * --disable-new-dtags:                   Options.            (line 1508)
   7122 * --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc:        Options.            (line 1915)
   7123 * --disable-stdcall-fixup:               Options.            (line 1620)
   7124 * --discard-all:                         Options.            (line  587)
   7125 * --discard-locals:                      Options.            (line  591)
   7126 * --dll:                                 Options.            (line 1593)
   7127 * --dll-search-prefix:                   Options.            (line 1773)
   7128 * --dotsyms:                             PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   33)
   7129 * --dsbt-index:                          Options.            (line 1992)
   7130 * --dsbt-size:                           Options.            (line 1987)
   7131 * --dynamic-linker=FILE:                 Options.            (line  903)
   7132 * --dynamic-list-cpp-new:                Options.            (line  809)
   7133 * --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo:           Options.            (line  813)
   7134 * --dynamic-list-data:                   Options.            (line  806)
   7135 * --dynamic-list=DYNAMIC-LIST-FILE:      Options.            (line  793)
   7136 * --dynamicbase:                         Options.            (line 1951)
   7137 * --eh-frame-hdr:                        Options.            (line 1499)
   7138 * --emit-relocs:                         Options.            (line  476)
   7139 * --emit-stack-syms:                     SPU ELF.            (line   46)
   7140 * --emit-stub-syms <1>:                  SPU ELF.            (line   15)
   7141 * --emit-stub-syms <2>:                  PowerPC ELF32.      (line   47)
   7142 * --emit-stub-syms:                      PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   29)
   7143 * --enable-auto-image-base:              Options.            (line 1759)
   7144 * --enable-auto-import:                  Options.            (line 1782)
   7145 * --enable-extra-pe-debug:               Options.            (line 1920)
   7146 * --enable-long-section-names:           Options.            (line 1598)
   7147 * --enable-new-dtags:                    Options.            (line 1508)
   7148 * --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc:         Options.            (line 1907)
   7149 * --enable-stdcall-fixup:                Options.            (line 1620)
   7150 * --entry=ENTRY:                         Options.            (line  187)
   7151 * --error-unresolved-symbols:            Options.            (line 1452)
   7152 * --exclude-all-symbols:                 Options.            (line 1674)
   7153 * --exclude-libs:                        Options.            (line  197)
   7154 * --exclude-modules-for-implib:          Options.            (line  208)
   7155 * --exclude-symbols:                     Options.            (line 1668)
   7156 * --export-all-symbols:                  Options.            (line 1644)
   7157 * --export-dynamic:                      Options.            (line  221)
   7158 * --extra-overlay-stubs:                 SPU ELF.            (line   19)
   7159 * --fatal-warnings:                      Options.            (line  910)
   7160 * --file-alignment:                      Options.            (line 1678)
   7161 * --filter=NAME:                         Options.            (line  276)
   7162 * --fix-arm1176:                         ARM.                (line  111)
   7163 * --fix-cortex-a8:                       i960.               (line   39)
   7164 * --fix-v4bx:                            ARM.                (line   49)
   7165 * --fix-v4bx-interworking:               ARM.                (line   62)
   7166 * --force-dynamic:                       Options.            (line  485)
   7167 * --force-exe-suffix:                    Options.            (line  915)
   7168 * --forceinteg:                          Options.            (line 1956)
   7169 * --format=FORMAT:                       Options.            (line  134)
   7170 * --format=VERSION:                      TI COFF.            (line    6)
   7171 * --gc-sections:                         Options.            (line  925)
   7172 * --got:                                 Options.            (line 2028)
   7173 * --got=TYPE:                            M68K.               (line    6)
   7174 * --gpsize=VALUE:                        Options.            (line  309)
   7175 * --hash-size=NUMBER:                    Options.            (line 1517)
   7176 * --hash-style=STYLE:                    Options.            (line 1525)
   7177 * --heap:                                Options.            (line 1684)
   7178 * --help:                                Options.            (line  962)
   7179 * --image-base:                          Options.            (line 1691)
   7180 * --just-symbols=FILE:                   Options.            (line  508)
   7181 * --kill-at:                             Options.            (line 1700)
   7182 * --large-address-aware:                 Options.            (line 1705)
   7183 * --ld-generated-unwind-info:            Options.            (line 1503)
   7184 * --leading-underscore:                  Options.            (line 1638)
   7185 * --library-path=DIR:                    Options.            (line  368)
   7186 * --library=NAMESPEC:                    Options.            (line  335)
   7187 * --local-store=lo:hi:                   SPU ELF.            (line   24)
   7188 * --major-image-version:                 Options.            (line 1714)
   7189 * --major-os-version:                    Options.            (line 1719)
   7190 * --major-subsystem-version:             Options.            (line 1723)
   7191 * --merge-exidx-entries:                 i960.               (line   48)
   7192 * --minor-image-version:                 Options.            (line 1728)
   7193 * --minor-os-version:                    Options.            (line 1733)
   7194 * --minor-subsystem-version:             Options.            (line 1737)
   7195 * --mri-script=MRI-CMDFILE:              Options.            (line  158)
   7196 * --multi-subspace:                      HPPA ELF32.         (line    6)
   7197 * --nmagic:                              Options.            (line  439)
   7198 * --no-accept-unknown-input-arch:        Options.            (line  714)
   7199 * --no-add-needed:                       Options.            (line  738)
   7200 * --no-allow-shlib-undefined:            Options.            (line  995)
   7201 * --no-as-needed:                        Options.            (line  724)
   7202 * --no-bind:                             Options.            (line 1970)
   7203 * --no-check-sections:                   Options.            (line  817)
   7204 * --no-copy-dt-needed-entries:           Options.            (line  829)
   7205 * --no-define-common:                    Options.            (line  861)
   7206 * --no-demangle:                         Options.            (line  890)
   7207 * --no-dotsyms:                          PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   33)
   7208 * --no-enum-size-warning:                ARM.                (line  120)
   7209 * --no-export-dynamic:                   Options.            (line  221)
   7210 * --no-fatal-warnings:                   Options.            (line  910)
   7211 * --no-fix-arm1176:                      ARM.                (line  111)
   7212 * --no-fix-cortex-a8:                    i960.               (line   39)
   7213 * --no-gc-sections:                      Options.            (line  925)
   7214 * --no-isolation:                        Options.            (line 1963)
   7215 * --no-keep-memory:                      Options.            (line  974)
   7216 * --no-leading-underscore:               Options.            (line 1638)
   7217 * --no-merge-exidx-entries <1>:          Options.            (line 1999)
   7218 * --no-merge-exidx-entries:              i960.               (line   48)
   7219 * --no-multi-toc:                        PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   74)
   7220 * --no-omagic:                           Options.            (line  454)
   7221 * --no-opd-optimize:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   48)
   7222 * --no-overlays:                         SPU ELF.            (line    9)
   7223 * --no-print-gc-sections:                Options.            (line  947)
   7224 * --no-seh:                              Options.            (line 1966)
   7225 * --no-tls-optimize <1>:                 PowerPC ELF32.      (line   51)
   7226 * --no-tls-optimize:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   43)
   7227 * --no-toc-optimize:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   60)
   7228 * --no-trampoline:                       Options.            (line 2009)
   7229 * --no-undefined:                        Options.            (line  981)
   7230 * --no-undefined-version:                Options.            (line 1023)
   7231 * --no-warn-mismatch:                    Options.            (line 1036)
   7232 * --no-warn-search-mismatch:             Options.            (line 1045)
   7233 * --no-wchar-size-warning:               ARM.                (line  127)
   7234 * --no-whole-archive:                    Options.            (line 1049)
   7235 * --noinhibit-exec:                      Options.            (line 1053)
   7236 * --non-overlapping-opd:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   54)
   7237 * --nxcompat:                            Options.            (line 1959)
   7238 * --oformat=OUTPUT-FORMAT:               Options.            (line 1065)
   7239 * --omagic:                              Options.            (line  445)
   7240 * --out-implib:                          Options.            (line 1750)
   7241 * --output-def:                          Options.            (line 1742)
   7242 * --output=OUTPUT:                       Options.            (line  460)
   7243 * --pic-executable:                      Options.            (line 1078)
   7244 * --pic-veneer:                          ARM.                (line  133)
   7245 * --plugin:                              SPU ELF.            (line    6)
   7246 * --print-gc-sections:                   Options.            (line  947)
   7247 * --print-map:                           Options.            (line  402)
   7248 * --print-output-format:                 Options.            (line  956)
   7249 * --reduce-memory-overheads:             Options.            (line 1531)
   7250 * --relax:                               Options.            (line 1094)
   7251 * --relax on i960:                       i960.               (line   31)
   7252 * --relax on PowerPC:                    PowerPC ELF32.      (line    6)
   7253 * --relax on Xtensa:                     Xtensa.             (line   27)
   7254 * --relocatable:                         Options.            (line  489)
   7255 * --retain-symbols-file=FILENAME:        Options.            (line 1120)
   7256 * --script=SCRIPT:                       Options.            (line  532)
   7257 * --sdata-got:                           PowerPC ELF32.      (line   33)
   7258 * --section-alignment:                   Options.            (line 1925)
   7259 * --section-start=SECTIONNAME=ORG:       Options.            (line 1276)
   7260 * --secure-plt:                          PowerPC ELF32.      (line   26)
   7261 * --sort-common:                         Options.            (line 1218)
   7262 * --sort-section=alignment:              Options.            (line 1233)
   7263 * --sort-section=name:                   Options.            (line 1229)
   7264 * --split-by-file:                       Options.            (line 1237)
   7265 * --split-by-reloc:                      Options.            (line 1242)
   7266 * --stack:                               Options.            (line 1931)
   7267 * --stack-analysis:                      SPU ELF.            (line   29)
   7268 * --stats:                               Options.            (line 1255)
   7269 * --strip-all:                           Options.            (line  519)
   7270 * --strip-debug:                         Options.            (line  523)
   7271 * --stub-group-size:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line    6)
   7272 * --stub-group-size=N <1>:               HPPA ELF32.         (line   12)
   7273 * --stub-group-size=N:                   ARM.                (line  138)
   7274 * --subsystem:                           Options.            (line 1938)
   7275 * --support-old-code:                    ARM.                (line    6)
   7276 * --sysroot=DIRECTORY:                   Options.            (line 1259)
   7277 * --target-help:                         Options.            (line  966)
   7278 * --target1-abs:                         ARM.                (line   32)
   7279 * --target1-rel:                         ARM.                (line   32)
   7280 * --target2=TYPE:                        ARM.                (line   37)
   7281 * --thumb-entry=ENTRY:                   ARM.                (line   17)
   7282 * --trace:                               Options.            (line  528)
   7283 * --trace-symbol=SYMBOL:                 Options.            (line  597)
   7284 * --traditional-format:                  Options.            (line 1264)
   7285 * --tsaware:                             Options.            (line 1976)
   7286 * --undefined=SYMBOL:                    Options.            (line  554)
   7287 * --unique[=SECTION]:                    Options.            (line  572)
   7288 * --unresolved-symbols:                  Options.            (line 1295)
   7289 * --use-blx:                             ARM.                (line   74)
   7290 * --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables:      ARM.                (line   23)
   7291 * --verbose[=NUMBER]:                    Options.            (line 1324)
   7292 * --version:                             Options.            (line  581)
   7293 * --version-script=VERSION-SCRIPTFILE:   Options.            (line 1332)
   7294 * --vfp11-denorm-fix:                    ARM.                (line   83)
   7295 * --warn-alternate-em:                   Options.            (line 1444)
   7296 * --warn-common:                         Options.            (line 1343)
   7297 * --warn-constructors:                   Options.            (line 1411)
   7298 * --warn-multiple-gp:                    Options.            (line 1416)
   7299 * --warn-once:                           Options.            (line 1430)
   7300 * --warn-section-align:                  Options.            (line 1434)
   7301 * --warn-shared-textrel:                 Options.            (line 1441)
   7302 * --warn-unresolved-symbols:             Options.            (line 1447)
   7303 * --wdmdriver:                           Options.            (line 1973)
   7304 * --whole-archive:                       Options.            (line 1456)
   7305 * --wrap=SYMBOL:                         Options.            (line 1470)
   7306 * -A ARCH:                               Options.            (line  122)
   7307 * -a KEYWORD:                            Options.            (line  105)
   7308 * -assert KEYWORD:                       Options.            (line  745)
   7309 * -b FORMAT:                             Options.            (line  134)
   7310 * -Bdynamic:                             Options.            (line  748)
   7311 * -Bgroup:                               Options.            (line  758)
   7312 * -Bshareable:                           Options.            (line 1211)
   7313 * -Bstatic:                              Options.            (line  765)
   7314 * -Bsymbolic:                            Options.            (line  780)
   7315 * -Bsymbolic-functions:                  Options.            (line  787)
   7316 * -c MRI-CMDFILE:                        Options.            (line  158)
   7317 * -call_shared:                          Options.            (line  748)
   7318 * -d:                                    Options.            (line  168)
   7319 * -dc:                                   Options.            (line  168)
   7320 * -dn:                                   Options.            (line  765)
   7321 * -dp:                                   Options.            (line  168)
   7322 * -dT SCRIPT:                            Options.            (line  541)
   7323 * -dy:                                   Options.            (line  748)
   7324 * -E:                                    Options.            (line  221)
   7325 * -e ENTRY:                              Options.            (line  187)
   7326 * -EB:                                   Options.            (line  248)
   7327 * -EL:                                   Options.            (line  251)
   7328 * -F NAME:                               Options.            (line  276)
   7329 * -f NAME:                               Options.            (line  255)
   7330 * -fini=NAME:                            Options.            (line  300)
   7331 * -g:                                    Options.            (line  306)
   7332 * -G VALUE:                              Options.            (line  309)
   7333 * -h NAME:                               Options.            (line  317)
   7334 * -i:                                    Options.            (line  326)
   7335 * -IFILE:                                Options.            (line  903)
   7336 * -init=NAME:                            Options.            (line  329)
   7337 * -L DIR:                                Options.            (line  368)
   7338 * -l NAMESPEC:                           Options.            (line  335)
   7339 * -M:                                    Options.            (line  402)
   7340 * -m EMULATION:                          Options.            (line  392)
   7341 * -Map=MAPFILE:                          Options.            (line  970)
   7342 * -n:                                    Options.            (line  439)
   7343 * -N:                                    Options.            (line  445)
   7344 * -no-relax:                             Options.            (line 1094)
   7345 * -non_shared:                           Options.            (line  765)
   7346 * -nostdlib:                             Options.            (line 1059)
   7347 * -O LEVEL:                              Options.            (line  466)
   7348 * -o OUTPUT:                             Options.            (line  460)
   7349 * -P AUDITLIB:                           Options.            (line  177)
   7350 * -pie:                                  Options.            (line 1078)
   7351 * -q:                                    Options.            (line  476)
   7352 * -qmagic:                               Options.            (line 1088)
   7353 * -Qy:                                   Options.            (line 1091)
   7354 * -r:                                    Options.            (line  489)
   7355 * -R FILE:                               Options.            (line  508)
   7356 * -rpath-link=DIR:                       Options.            (line 1156)
   7357 * -rpath=DIR:                            Options.            (line 1134)
   7358 * -s:                                    Options.            (line  519)
   7359 * -S:                                    Options.            (line  523)
   7360 * -shared:                               Options.            (line 1211)
   7361 * -soname=NAME:                          Options.            (line  317)
   7362 * -static:                               Options.            (line  765)
   7363 * -t:                                    Options.            (line  528)
   7364 * -T SCRIPT:                             Options.            (line  532)
   7365 * -Tbss=ORG:                             Options.            (line 1285)
   7366 * -Tdata=ORG:                            Options.            (line 1285)
   7367 * -Ttext-segment=ORG:                    Options.            (line 1291)
   7368 * -Ttext=ORG:                            Options.            (line 1285)
   7369 * -u SYMBOL:                             Options.            (line  554)
   7370 * -Ur:                                   Options.            (line  562)
   7371 * -v:                                    Options.            (line  581)
   7372 * -V:                                    Options.            (line  581)
   7373 * -x:                                    Options.            (line  587)
   7374 * -X:                                    Options.            (line  591)
   7375 * -Y PATH:                               Options.            (line  606)
   7376 * -y SYMBOL:                             Options.            (line  597)
   7377 * -z defs:                               Options.            (line  981)
   7378 * -z KEYWORD:                            Options.            (line  610)
   7379 * -z muldefs:                            Options.            (line  989)
   7380 * .:                                     Location Counter.   (line    6)
   7381 * /DISCARD/:                             Output Section Discarding.
   7382                                                              (line   21)
   7383 * :PHDR:                                 Output Section Phdr.
   7384                                                              (line    6)
   7385 * =FILLEXP:                              Output Section Fill.
   7386                                                              (line    6)
   7387 * >REGION:                               Output Section Region.
   7388                                                              (line    6)
   7389 * [COMMON]:                              Input Section Common.
   7390                                                              (line   29)
   7391 * ABSOLUTE (MRI):                        MRI.                (line   33)
   7392 * absolute and relocatable symbols:      Expression Section. (line    6)
   7393 * absolute expressions:                  Expression Section. (line    6)
   7394 * ABSOLUTE(EXP):                         Builtin Functions.  (line   10)
   7395 * ADDR(SECTION):                         Builtin Functions.  (line   17)
   7396 * address, section:                      Output Section Address.
   7397                                                              (line    6)
   7398 * ALIAS (MRI):                           MRI.                (line   44)
   7399 * ALIGN (MRI):                           MRI.                (line   50)
   7400 * align expression:                      Builtin Functions.  (line   38)
   7401 * align location counter:                Builtin Functions.  (line   38)
   7402 * ALIGN(ALIGN):                          Builtin Functions.  (line   38)
   7403 * ALIGN(EXP,ALIGN):                      Builtin Functions.  (line   38)
   7404 * ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN):                  Forced Output Alignment.
   7405                                                              (line    6)
   7406 * aligned common symbols:                WIN32.              (line  424)
   7407 * ALIGNOF(SECTION):                      Builtin Functions.  (line   64)
   7408 * allocating memory:                     MEMORY.             (line    6)
   7409 * architecture:                          Miscellaneous Commands.
   7410                                                              (line   72)
   7411 * architectures:                         Options.            (line  122)
   7412 * archive files, from cmd line:          Options.            (line  335)
   7413 * archive search path in linker script:  File Commands.      (line   74)
   7414 * arithmetic:                            Expressions.        (line    6)
   7415 * arithmetic operators:                  Operators.          (line    6)
   7416 * ARM interworking support:              ARM.                (line    6)
   7417 * ARM1176 erratum workaround:            ARM.                (line  111)
   7418 * AS_NEEDED(FILES):                      File Commands.      (line   54)
   7419 * ASSERT:                                Miscellaneous Commands.
   7420                                                              (line    9)
   7421 * assertion in linker script:            Miscellaneous Commands.
   7422                                                              (line    9)
   7423 * assignment in scripts:                 Assignments.        (line    6)
   7424 * AT(LMA):                               Output Section LMA. (line    6)
   7425 * AT>LMA_REGION:                         Output Section LMA. (line    6)
   7426 * automatic data imports:                WIN32.              (line  191)
   7427 * back end:                              BFD.                (line    6)
   7428 * BASE (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   54)
   7429 * BE8:                                   ARM.                (line   28)
   7430 * BFD canonical format:                  Canonical format.   (line   11)
   7431 * BFD requirements:                      BFD.                (line   16)
   7432 * big-endian objects:                    Options.            (line  248)
   7433 * binary input format:                   Options.            (line  134)
   7434 * BLOCK(EXP):                            Builtin Functions.  (line   77)
   7435 * bug criteria:                          Bug Criteria.       (line    6)
   7436 * bug reports:                           Bug Reporting.      (line    6)
   7437 * bugs in ld:                            Reporting Bugs.     (line    6)
   7438 * BYTE(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
   7439                                                              (line    6)
   7440 * C++ constructors, arranging in link:   Output Section Keywords.
   7441                                                              (line   19)
   7442 * CHIP (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   58)
   7443 * COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE:                   Environment.        (line   29)
   7444 * combining symbols, warnings on:        Options.            (line 1343)
   7445 * command files:                         Scripts.            (line    6)
   7446 * command line:                          Options.            (line    6)
   7447 * common allocation:                     Options.            (line  861)
   7448 * common allocation in linker script:    Miscellaneous Commands.
   7449                                                              (line   20)
   7450 * common symbol placement:               Input Section Common.
   7451                                                              (line    6)
   7452 * COMMONPAGESIZE:                        Symbolic Constants. (line   13)
   7453 * compatibility, MRI:                    Options.            (line  158)
   7454 * CONSTANT:                              Symbolic Constants. (line    6)
   7455 * constants in linker scripts:           Constants.          (line    6)
   7456 * constraints on output sections:        Output Section Constraint.
   7457                                                              (line    6)
   7458 * CONSTRUCTORS:                          Output Section Keywords.
   7459                                                              (line   19)
   7460 * constructors:                          Options.            (line  562)
   7461 * constructors, arranging in link:       Output Section Keywords.
   7462                                                              (line   19)
   7463 * Cortex-A8 erratum workaround:          i960.               (line   39)
   7464 * crash of linker:                       Bug Criteria.       (line    9)
   7465 * CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS:                 Output Section Keywords.
   7466                                                              (line    9)
   7467 * creating a DEF file:                   WIN32.              (line  158)
   7468 * cross reference table:                 Options.            (line  849)
   7469 * cross references:                      Miscellaneous Commands.
   7470                                                              (line   56)
   7471 * current output location:               Location Counter.   (line    6)
   7472 * data:                                  Output Section Data.
   7473                                                              (line    6)
   7474 * DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE, COMMONPAGESIZE): Builtin Functions.
   7475                                                              (line   82)
   7476 * DATA_SEGMENT_END(EXP):                 Builtin Functions.  (line  103)
   7477 * DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(OFFSET, EXP):   Builtin Functions.  (line  109)
   7478 * dbx:                                   Options.            (line 1269)
   7479 * DEF files, creating:                   Options.            (line 1742)
   7480 * default emulation:                     Environment.        (line   21)
   7481 * default input format:                  Environment.        (line    9)
   7482 * DEFINED(SYMBOL):                       Builtin Functions.  (line  120)
   7483 * deleting local symbols:                Options.            (line  587)
   7484 * demangling, default:                   Environment.        (line   29)
   7485 * demangling, from command line:         Options.            (line  890)
   7486 * direct linking to a dll:               WIN32.              (line  239)
   7487 * discarding sections:                   Output Section Discarding.
   7488                                                              (line    6)
   7489 * discontinuous memory:                  MEMORY.             (line    6)
   7490 * DLLs, creating:                        Options.            (line 1742)
   7491 * DLLs, linking to:                      Options.            (line 1773)
   7492 * dot:                                   Location Counter.   (line    6)
   7493 * dot inside sections:                   Location Counter.   (line   36)
   7494 * dot outside sections:                  Location Counter.   (line   66)
   7495 * dynamic linker, from command line:     Options.            (line  903)
   7496 * dynamic symbol table:                  Options.            (line  221)
   7497 * ELF program headers:                   PHDRS.              (line    6)
   7498 * emulation:                             Options.            (line  392)
   7499 * emulation, default:                    Environment.        (line   21)
   7500 * END (MRI):                             MRI.                (line   62)
   7501 * endianness:                            Options.            (line  248)
   7502 * entry point:                           Entry Point.        (line    6)
   7503 * entry point, from command line:        Options.            (line  187)
   7504 * entry point, thumb:                    ARM.                (line   17)
   7505 * ENTRY(SYMBOL):                         Entry Point.        (line    6)
   7506 * error on valid input:                  Bug Criteria.       (line   12)
   7507 * example of linker script:              Simple Example.     (line    6)
   7508 * exporting DLL symbols:                 WIN32.              (line   19)
   7509 * expression evaluation order:           Evaluation.         (line    6)
   7510 * expression sections:                   Expression Section. (line    6)
   7511 * expression, absolute:                  Builtin Functions.  (line   10)
   7512 * expressions:                           Expressions.        (line    6)
   7513 * EXTERN:                                Miscellaneous Commands.
   7514                                                              (line   13)
   7515 * fatal signal:                          Bug Criteria.       (line    9)
   7516 * file name wildcard patterns:           Input Section Wildcards.
   7517                                                              (line    6)
   7518 * FILEHDR:                               PHDRS.              (line   62)
   7519 * filename symbols:                      Output Section Keywords.
   7520                                                              (line    9)
   7521 * fill pattern, entire section:          Output Section Fill.
   7522                                                              (line    6)
   7523 * FILL(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
   7524                                                              (line   39)
   7525 * finalization function:                 Options.            (line  300)
   7526 * first input file:                      File Commands.      (line   82)
   7527 * first instruction:                     Entry Point.        (line    6)
   7528 * FIX_V4BX:                              ARM.                (line   49)
   7529 * FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING:                 ARM.                (line   62)
   7530 * FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION:               Miscellaneous Commands.
   7531                                                              (line   20)
   7532 * forcing input section alignment:       Forced Input Alignment.
   7533                                                              (line    6)
   7534 * forcing output section alignment:      Forced Output Alignment.
   7535                                                              (line    6)
   7536 * forcing the creation of dynamic sections: Options.         (line  485)
   7537 * FORMAT (MRI):                          MRI.                (line   66)
   7538 * functions in expressions:              Builtin Functions.  (line    6)
   7539 * garbage collection <1>:                Input Section Keep. (line    6)
   7540 * garbage collection:                    Options.            (line  925)
   7541 * generating optimized output:           Options.            (line  466)
   7542 * GNU linker:                            Overview.           (line    6)
   7543 * GNUTARGET:                             Environment.        (line    9)
   7544 * GROUP(FILES):                          File Commands.      (line   47)
   7545 * grouping input files:                  File Commands.      (line   47)
   7546 * groups of archives:                    Options.            (line  696)
   7547 * H8/300 support:                        H8/300.             (line    6)
   7548 * header size:                           Builtin Functions.  (line  183)
   7549 * heap size:                             Options.            (line 1684)
   7550 * help:                                  Options.            (line  962)
   7551 * holes:                                 Location Counter.   (line   12)
   7552 * holes, filling:                        Output Section Data.
   7553                                                              (line   39)
   7554 * HPPA multiple sub-space stubs:         HPPA ELF32.         (line    6)
   7555 * HPPA stub grouping:                    HPPA ELF32.         (line   12)
   7556 * i960 support:                          i960.               (line    6)
   7557 * image base:                            Options.            (line 1691)
   7558 * implicit linker scripts:               Implicit Linker Scripts.
   7559                                                              (line    6)
   7560 * import libraries:                      WIN32.              (line   10)
   7561 * INCLUDE FILENAME:                      File Commands.      (line    9)
   7562 * including a linker script:             File Commands.      (line    9)
   7563 * including an entire archive:           Options.            (line 1456)
   7564 * incremental link:                      Options.            (line  326)
   7565 * INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION:             Miscellaneous Commands.
   7566                                                              (line   25)
   7567 * initialization function:               Options.            (line  329)
   7568 * initialized data in ROM:               Output Section LMA. (line   39)
   7569 * input file format in linker script:    Format Commands.    (line   35)
   7570 * input filename symbols:                Output Section Keywords.
   7571                                                              (line    9)
   7572 * input files in linker scripts:         File Commands.      (line   19)
   7573 * input files, displaying:               Options.            (line  528)
   7574 * input format:                          Options.            (line  134)
   7575 * input object files in linker scripts:  File Commands.      (line   19)
   7576 * input section alignment:               Forced Input Alignment.
   7577                                                              (line    6)
   7578 * input section basics:                  Input Section Basics.
   7579                                                              (line    6)
   7580 * input section wildcards:               Input Section Wildcards.
   7581                                                              (line    6)
   7582 * input sections:                        Input Section.      (line    6)
   7583 * INPUT(FILES):                          File Commands.      (line   19)
   7584 * INSERT:                                Miscellaneous Commands.
   7585                                                              (line   30)
   7586 * insert user script into default script: Miscellaneous Commands.
   7587                                                              (line   30)
   7588 * integer notation:                      Constants.          (line    6)
   7589 * integer suffixes:                      Constants.          (line   15)
   7590 * internal object-file format:           Canonical format.   (line   11)
   7591 * invalid input:                         Bug Criteria.       (line   14)
   7592 * K and M integer suffixes:              Constants.          (line   15)
   7593 * KEEP:                                  Input Section Keep. (line    6)
   7594 * l =:                                   MEMORY.             (line   74)
   7595 * lazy evaluation:                       Evaluation.         (line    6)
   7596 * ld bugs, reporting:                    Bug Reporting.      (line    6)
   7597 * LD_FEATURE(STRING):                    Miscellaneous Commands.
   7598                                                              (line   78)
   7599 * LDEMULATION:                           Environment.        (line   21)
   7600 * len =:                                 MEMORY.             (line   74)
   7601 * LENGTH =:                              MEMORY.             (line   74)
   7602 * LENGTH(MEMORY):                        Builtin Functions.  (line  137)
   7603 * library search path in linker script:  File Commands.      (line   74)
   7604 * link map:                              Options.            (line  402)
   7605 * link-time runtime library search path: Options.            (line 1156)
   7606 * linker crash:                          Bug Criteria.       (line    9)
   7607 * linker script concepts:                Basic Script Concepts.
   7608                                                              (line    6)
   7609 * linker script example:                 Simple Example.     (line    6)
   7610 * linker script file commands:           File Commands.      (line    6)
   7611 * linker script format:                  Script Format.      (line    6)
   7612 * linker script input object files:      File Commands.      (line   19)
   7613 * linker script simple commands:         Simple Commands.    (line    6)
   7614 * linker scripts:                        Scripts.            (line    6)
   7615 * LIST (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   77)
   7616 * little-endian objects:                 Options.            (line  251)
   7617 * LOAD (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   84)
   7618 * load address:                          Output Section LMA. (line    6)
   7619 * LOADADDR(SECTION):                     Builtin Functions.  (line  140)
   7620 * loading, preventing:                   Output Section Type.
   7621                                                              (line   22)
   7622 * local symbols, deleting:               Options.            (line  591)
   7623 * location counter:                      Location Counter.   (line    6)
   7624 * LONG(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
   7625                                                              (line    6)
   7626 * M and K integer suffixes:              Constants.          (line   15)
   7627 * M68HC11 and 68HC12 support:            M68HC11/68HC12.     (line    6)
   7628 * machine architecture:                  Miscellaneous Commands.
   7629                                                              (line   72)
   7630 * machine dependencies:                  Machine Dependent.  (line    6)
   7631 * mapping input sections to output sections: Input Section.  (line    6)
   7632 * MAX:                                   Builtin Functions.  (line  143)
   7633 * MAXPAGESIZE:                           Symbolic Constants. (line   10)
   7634 * MEMORY:                                MEMORY.             (line    6)
   7635 * memory region attributes:              MEMORY.             (line   34)
   7636 * memory regions:                        MEMORY.             (line    6)
   7637 * memory regions and sections:           Output Section Region.
   7638                                                              (line    6)
   7639 * memory usage:                          Options.            (line  974)
   7640 * MIN:                                   Builtin Functions.  (line  146)
   7641 * Motorola 68K GOT generation:           M68K.               (line    6)
   7642 * MRI compatibility:                     MRI.                (line    6)
   7643 * MSP430 extra sections:                 MSP430.             (line   11)
   7644 * NAME (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   90)
   7645 * name, section:                         Output Section Name.
   7646                                                              (line    6)
   7647 * names:                                 Symbols.            (line    6)
   7648 * naming the output file:                Options.            (line  460)
   7649 * NEXT(EXP):                             Builtin Functions.  (line  150)
   7650 * NMAGIC:                                Options.            (line  439)
   7651 * NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING:                  ARM.                (line  120)
   7652 * NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING:                 ARM.                (line  127)
   7653 * NOCROSSREFS(SECTIONS):                 Miscellaneous Commands.
   7654                                                              (line   56)
   7655 * NOLOAD:                                Output Section Type.
   7656                                                              (line   22)
   7657 * not enough room for program headers:   Builtin Functions.  (line  188)
   7658 * o =:                                   MEMORY.             (line   69)
   7659 * objdump -i:                            BFD.                (line    6)
   7660 * object file management:                BFD.                (line    6)
   7661 * object files:                          Options.            (line   29)
   7662 * object formats available:              BFD.                (line    6)
   7663 * object size:                           Options.            (line  309)
   7664 * OMAGIC:                                Options.            (line  445)
   7665 * ONLY_IF_RO:                            Output Section Constraint.
   7666                                                              (line    6)
   7667 * ONLY_IF_RW:                            Output Section Constraint.
   7668                                                              (line    6)
   7669 * opening object files:                  BFD outline.        (line    6)
   7670 * operators for arithmetic:              Operators.          (line    6)
   7671 * options:                               Options.            (line    6)
   7672 * ORDER (MRI):                           MRI.                (line   95)
   7673 * org =:                                 MEMORY.             (line   69)
   7674 * ORIGIN =:                              MEMORY.             (line   69)
   7675 * ORIGIN(MEMORY):                        Builtin Functions.  (line  156)
   7676 * orphan:                                Orphan Sections.    (line    6)
   7677 * output file after errors:              Options.            (line 1053)
   7678 * output file format in linker script:   Format Commands.    (line   10)
   7679 * output file name in linker script:     File Commands.      (line   64)
   7680 * output format:                         Options.            (line  956)
   7681 * output section alignment:              Forced Output Alignment.
   7682                                                              (line    6)
   7683 * output section attributes:             Output Section Attributes.
   7684                                                              (line    6)
   7685 * output section data:                   Output Section Data.
   7686                                                              (line    6)
   7687 * OUTPUT(FILENAME):                      File Commands.      (line   64)
   7688 * OUTPUT_ARCH(BFDARCH):                  Miscellaneous Commands.
   7689                                                              (line   72)
   7690 * OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME):                Format Commands.    (line   10)
   7691 * OVERLAY:                               Overlay Description.
   7692                                                              (line    6)
   7693 * overlays:                              Overlay Description.
   7694                                                              (line    6)
   7695 * partial link:                          Options.            (line  489)
   7696 * PE import table prefixing:             ARM.                (line   23)
   7697 * PHDRS:                                 PHDRS.              (line    6)
   7698 * PIC_VENEER:                            ARM.                (line  133)
   7699 * position independent executables:      Options.            (line 1080)
   7700 * PowerPC ELF32 options:                 PowerPC ELF32.      (line   16)
   7701 * PowerPC GOT:                           PowerPC ELF32.      (line   33)
   7702 * PowerPC long branches:                 PowerPC ELF32.      (line    6)
   7703 * PowerPC PLT:                           PowerPC ELF32.      (line   16)
   7704 * PowerPC stub symbols:                  PowerPC ELF32.      (line   47)
   7705 * PowerPC TLS optimization:              PowerPC ELF32.      (line   51)
   7706 * PowerPC64 dot symbols:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   33)
   7707 * PowerPC64 ELF64 options:               PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line    6)
   7708 * PowerPC64 multi-TOC:                   PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   74)
   7709 * PowerPC64 OPD optimization:            PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   48)
   7710 * PowerPC64 OPD spacing:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   54)
   7711 * PowerPC64 stub grouping:               PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line    6)
   7712 * PowerPC64 stub symbols:                PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   29)
   7713 * PowerPC64 TLS optimization:            PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   43)
   7714 * PowerPC64 TOC optimization:            PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   60)
   7715 * precedence in expressions:             Operators.          (line    6)
   7716 * prevent unnecessary loading:           Output Section Type.
   7717                                                              (line   22)
   7718 * program headers:                       PHDRS.              (line    6)
   7719 * program headers and sections:          Output Section Phdr.
   7720                                                              (line    6)
   7721 * program headers, not enough room:      Builtin Functions.  (line  188)
   7722 * program segments:                      PHDRS.              (line    6)
   7723 * PROVIDE:                               PROVIDE.            (line    6)
   7724 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:                        PROVIDE_HIDDEN.     (line    6)
   7725 * PUBLIC (MRI):                          MRI.                (line  103)
   7726 * QUAD(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
   7727                                                              (line    6)
   7728 * quoted symbol names:                   Symbols.            (line    6)
   7729 * read-only text:                        Options.            (line  439)
   7730 * read/write from cmd line:              Options.            (line  445)
   7731 * region alias:                          REGION_ALIAS.       (line    6)
   7732 * region names:                          REGION_ALIAS.       (line    6)
   7733 * REGION_ALIAS(ALIAS, REGION):           REGION_ALIAS.       (line    6)
   7734 * regions of memory:                     MEMORY.             (line    6)
   7735 * relative expressions:                  Expression Section. (line    6)
   7736 * relaxing addressing modes:             Options.            (line 1094)
   7737 * relaxing on H8/300:                    H8/300.             (line    9)
   7738 * relaxing on i960:                      i960.               (line   31)
   7739 * relaxing on M68HC11:                   M68HC11/68HC12.     (line   12)
   7740 * relaxing on Xtensa:                    Xtensa.             (line   27)
   7741 * relocatable and absolute symbols:      Expression Section. (line    6)
   7742 * relocatable output:                    Options.            (line  489)
   7743 * removing sections:                     Output Section Discarding.
   7744                                                              (line    6)
   7745 * reporting bugs in ld:                  Reporting Bugs.     (line    6)
   7746 * requirements for BFD:                  BFD.                (line   16)
   7747 * retain relocations in final executable: Options.           (line  476)
   7748 * retaining specified symbols:           Options.            (line 1120)
   7749 * ROM initialized data:                  Output Section LMA. (line   39)
   7750 * round up expression:                   Builtin Functions.  (line   38)
   7751 * round up location counter:             Builtin Functions.  (line   38)
   7752 * runtime library name:                  Options.            (line  317)
   7753 * runtime library search path:           Options.            (line 1134)
   7754 * runtime pseudo-relocation:             WIN32.              (line  217)
   7755 * scaled integers:                       Constants.          (line   15)
   7756 * scommon section:                       Input Section Common.
   7757                                                              (line   20)
   7758 * script files:                          Options.            (line  532)
   7759 * scripts:                               Scripts.            (line    6)
   7760 * search directory, from cmd line:       Options.            (line  368)
   7761 * search path in linker script:          File Commands.      (line   74)
   7762 * SEARCH_DIR(PATH):                      File Commands.      (line   74)
   7763 * SECT (MRI):                            MRI.                (line  109)
   7764 * section address:                       Output Section Address.
   7765                                                              (line    6)
   7766 * section address in expression:         Builtin Functions.  (line   17)
   7767 * section alignment:                     Builtin Functions.  (line   64)
   7768 * section alignment, warnings on:        Options.            (line 1434)
   7769 * section data:                          Output Section Data.
   7770                                                              (line    6)
   7771 * section fill pattern:                  Output Section Fill.
   7772                                                              (line    6)
   7773 * section load address:                  Output Section LMA. (line    6)
   7774 * section load address in expression:    Builtin Functions.  (line  140)
   7775 * section name:                          Output Section Name.
   7776                                                              (line    6)
   7777 * section name wildcard patterns:        Input Section Wildcards.
   7778                                                              (line    6)
   7779 * section size:                          Builtin Functions.  (line  167)
   7780 * section, assigning to memory region:   Output Section Region.
   7781                                                              (line    6)
   7782 * section, assigning to program header:  Output Section Phdr.
   7783                                                              (line    6)
   7784 * SECTIONS:                              SECTIONS.           (line    6)
   7785 * sections, discarding:                  Output Section Discarding.
   7786                                                              (line    6)
   7787 * segment origins, cmd line:             Options.            (line 1285)
   7788 * SEGMENT_START(SEGMENT, DEFAULT):       Builtin Functions.  (line  159)
   7789 * segments, ELF:                         PHDRS.              (line    6)
   7790 * shared libraries:                      Options.            (line 1213)
   7791 * SHORT(EXPRESSION):                     Output Section Data.
   7792                                                              (line    6)
   7793 * SIZEOF(SECTION):                       Builtin Functions.  (line  167)
   7794 * SIZEOF_HEADERS:                        Builtin Functions.  (line  183)
   7795 * small common symbols:                  Input Section Common.
   7796                                                              (line   20)
   7797 * SORT:                                  Input Section Wildcards.
   7798                                                              (line   63)
   7799 * SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT:                     Input Section Wildcards.
   7800                                                              (line   54)
   7801 * SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY:                 Input Section Wildcards.
   7802                                                              (line   58)
   7803 * SORT_BY_NAME:                          Input Section Wildcards.
   7804                                                              (line   46)
   7805 * SPU:                                   SPU ELF.            (line   29)
   7806 * SPU ELF options:                       SPU ELF.            (line    6)
   7807 * SPU extra overlay stubs:               SPU ELF.            (line   19)
   7808 * SPU local store size:                  SPU ELF.            (line   24)
   7809 * SPU overlay stub symbols:              SPU ELF.            (line   15)
   7810 * SPU overlays:                          SPU ELF.            (line    9)
   7811 * SPU plugins:                           SPU ELF.            (line    6)
   7812 * SQUAD(EXPRESSION):                     Output Section Data.
   7813                                                              (line    6)
   7814 * stack size:                            Options.            (line 1931)
   7815 * standard Unix system:                  Options.            (line    7)
   7816 * start of execution:                    Entry Point.        (line    6)
   7817 * STARTUP(FILENAME):                     File Commands.      (line   82)
   7818 * strip all symbols:                     Options.            (line  519)
   7819 * strip debugger symbols:                Options.            (line  523)
   7820 * stripping all but some symbols:        Options.            (line 1120)
   7821 * STUB_GROUP_SIZE:                       ARM.                (line  138)
   7822 * SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN):            Forced Input Alignment.
   7823                                                              (line    6)
   7824 * suffixes for integers:                 Constants.          (line   15)
   7825 * symbol defaults:                       Builtin Functions.  (line  120)
   7826 * symbol definition, scripts:            Assignments.        (line    6)
   7827 * symbol names:                          Symbols.            (line    6)
   7828 * symbol tracing:                        Options.            (line  597)
   7829 * symbol versions:                       VERSION.            (line    6)
   7830 * symbol-only input:                     Options.            (line  508)
   7831 * symbolic constants:                    Symbolic Constants. (line    6)
   7832 * symbols, from command line:            Options.            (line  877)
   7833 * symbols, relocatable and absolute:     Expression Section. (line    6)
   7834 * symbols, retaining selectively:        Options.            (line 1120)
   7835 * synthesizing linker:                   Options.            (line 1094)
   7836 * synthesizing on H8/300:                H8/300.             (line   14)
   7837 * TARGET(BFDNAME):                       Format Commands.    (line   35)
   7838 * TARGET1:                               ARM.                (line   32)
   7839 * TARGET2:                               ARM.                (line   37)
   7840 * text segment origin, cmd line:         Options.            (line 1292)
   7841 * thumb entry point:                     ARM.                (line   17)
   7842 * TI COFF versions:                      TI COFF.            (line    6)
   7843 * traditional format:                    Options.            (line 1264)
   7844 * trampoline generation on M68HC11:      M68HC11/68HC12.     (line   31)
   7845 * trampoline generation on M68HC12:      M68HC11/68HC12.     (line   31)
   7846 * unallocated address, next:             Builtin Functions.  (line  150)
   7847 * undefined symbol:                      Options.            (line  554)
   7848 * undefined symbol in linker script:     Miscellaneous Commands.
   7849                                                              (line   13)
   7850 * undefined symbols, warnings on:        Options.            (line 1430)
   7851 * uninitialized data placement:          Input Section Common.
   7852                                                              (line    6)
   7853 * unspecified memory:                    Output Section Data.
   7854                                                              (line   39)
   7855 * usage:                                 Options.            (line  962)
   7856 * USE_BLX:                               ARM.                (line   74)
   7857 * using a DEF file:                      WIN32.              (line   57)
   7858 * using auto-export functionality:       WIN32.              (line   22)
   7859 * Using decorations:                     WIN32.              (line  162)
   7860 * variables, defining:                   Assignments.        (line    6)
   7861 * verbose[=NUMBER]:                      Options.            (line 1324)
   7862 * version:                               Options.            (line  581)
   7863 * version script:                        VERSION.            (line    6)
   7864 * version script, symbol versions:       Options.            (line 1332)
   7865 * VERSION {script text}:                 VERSION.            (line    6)
   7866 * versions of symbols:                   VERSION.            (line    6)
   7867 * VFP11_DENORM_FIX:                      ARM.                (line   83)
   7868 * warnings, on combining symbols:        Options.            (line 1343)
   7869 * warnings, on section alignment:        Options.            (line 1434)
   7870 * warnings, on undefined symbols:        Options.            (line 1430)
   7871 * weak externals:                        WIN32.              (line  407)
   7872 * what is this?:                         Overview.           (line    6)
   7873 * wildcard file name patterns:           Input Section Wildcards.
   7874                                                              (line    6)
   7875 * Xtensa options:                        Xtensa.             (line   56)
   7876 * Xtensa processors:                     Xtensa.             (line    6)
   7877 
   7878 
   7879 
   7880 Tag Table:
   7881 Node: Top816
   7882 Node: Overview1602
   7883 Node: Invocation2716
   7884 Node: Options3124
   7885 Node: Environment94796
   7886 Node: Scripts96556
   7887 Node: Basic Script Concepts98290
   7888 Node: Script Format100997
   7889 Node: Simple Example101860
   7890 Node: Simple Commands104956
   7891 Node: Entry Point105462
   7892 Node: File Commands106395
   7893 Node: Format Commands110396
   7894 Node: REGION_ALIAS112352
   7895 Node: Miscellaneous Commands117184
   7896 Node: Assignments120792
   7897 Node: Simple Assignments121283
   7898 Node: PROVIDE123019
   7899 Node: PROVIDE_HIDDEN124224
   7900 Node: Source Code Reference124468
   7901 Node: SECTIONS128048
   7902 Node: Output Section Description129939
   7903 Node: Output Section Name131026
   7904 Node: Output Section Address131902
   7905 Node: Input Section134137
   7906 Node: Input Section Basics134938
   7907 Node: Input Section Wildcards138844
   7908 Node: Input Section Common143844
   7909 Node: Input Section Keep145326
   7910 Node: Input Section Example145816
   7911 Node: Output Section Data146784
   7912 Node: Output Section Keywords149561
   7913 Node: Output Section Discarding153130
   7914 Node: Output Section Attributes154311
   7915 Node: Output Section Type155412
   7916 Node: Output Section LMA156483
   7917 Node: Forced Output Alignment159554
   7918 Node: Forced Input Alignment159822
   7919 Node: Output Section Constraint160211
   7920 Node: Output Section Region160639
   7921 Node: Output Section Phdr161072
   7922 Node: Output Section Fill161736
   7923 Node: Overlay Description162878
   7924 Node: MEMORY167181
   7925 Node: PHDRS171516
   7926 Node: VERSION176770
   7927 Node: Expressions184863
   7928 Node: Constants185792
   7929 Node: Symbolic Constants186667
   7930 Node: Symbols187218
   7931 Node: Orphan Sections187965
   7932 Node: Location Counter189129
   7933 Node: Operators193565
   7934 Node: Evaluation194487
   7935 Node: Expression Section195851
   7936 Node: Builtin Functions199508
   7937 Node: Implicit Linker Scripts207469
   7938 Node: Machine Dependent208244
   7939 Node: H8/300209260
   7940 Node: i960210885
   7941 Node: M68HC11/68HC12213089
   7942 Node: ARM214543
   7943 Node: HPPA ELF32222506
   7944 Node: M68K224129
   7945 Node: MMIX225038
   7946 Node: MSP430226203
   7947 Node: PowerPC ELF32227252
   7948 Node: PowerPC64 ELF64230088
   7949 Node: SPU ELF234504
   7950 Node: TI COFF237136
   7951 Node: WIN32237662
   7952 Node: Xtensa257787
   7953 Node: BFD260752
   7954 Node: BFD outline262207
   7955 Node: BFD information loss263493
   7956 Node: Canonical format266010
   7957 Node: Reporting Bugs270367
   7958 Node: Bug Criteria271061
   7959 Node: Bug Reporting271760
   7960 Node: MRI278799
   7961 Node: GNU Free Documentation License283442
   7962 Node: LD Index308598
   7963 
   7964 End Tag Table
   7965